|
version 1.1, 1997/05/21 20:40:05
|
version 1.3, 2000/05/15 14:04:12
|
|
Line 1
|
Line 1
|
| %% TeX macros to handle texinfo files |
% texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files. |
| |
% |
| % Copyright (C) 1985, 86, 88, 90, 91, 92, 93, |
% Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex. |
| % 94, 95, 1996 Free Software Foundation, Inc. |
|
| |
|
| %This texinfo.tex file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or |
|
| %modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as |
|
| %published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at |
|
| %your option) any later version. |
|
| |
|
| %This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be |
|
| %useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty |
|
| %of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU |
|
| %General Public License for more details. |
|
| |
|
| %You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License |
|
| %along with this texinfo.tex file; see the file COPYING. If not, write |
|
| %to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, |
|
| %Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. |
|
| |
|
| |
|
| %In other words, you are welcome to use, share and improve this program. |
|
| %You are forbidden to forbid anyone else to use, share and improve |
|
| %what you give them. Help stamp out software-hoarding! |
|
| |
|
| |
|
| % Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@prep.ai.mit.edu. |
|
| % Please include a *precise* test case in each bug report. |
|
| |
|
| |
|
| % Make it possible to create a .fmt file just by loading this file: |
|
| % if the underlying format is not loaded, start by loading it now. |
|
| % Added by gildea November 1993. |
|
| \expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi |
\expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi |
| |
% |
| |
\def\texinfoversion{1999-09-25.10} |
| |
% |
| |
% Copyright (C) 1985, 86, 88, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99 |
| |
% Free Software Foundation, Inc. |
| |
% |
| |
% This texinfo.tex file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or |
| |
% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as |
| |
% published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at |
| |
% your option) any later version. |
| |
% |
| |
% This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be |
| |
% useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty |
| |
% of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU |
| |
% General Public License for more details. |
| |
% |
| |
% You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License |
| |
% along with this texinfo.tex file; see the file COPYING. If not, write |
| |
% to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, |
| |
% Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. |
| |
% |
| |
% In other words, you are welcome to use, share and improve this program. |
| |
% You are forbidden to forbid anyone else to use, share and improve |
| |
% what you give them. Help stamp out software-hoarding! |
| |
% |
| |
% Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug |
| |
% reports; you can get the latest version from: |
| |
% ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/texinfo.tex |
| |
% (and all GNU mirrors, see http://www.gnu.org/order/ftp.html) |
| |
% ftp://texinfo.org/tex/texinfo.tex |
| |
% ftp://us.ctan.org/macros/texinfo/texinfo.tex |
| |
% (and all CTAN mirrors, finger ctan@us.ctan.org for a list). |
| |
% /home/gd/gnu/doc/texinfo.tex on the GNU machines. |
| |
% The texinfo.tex in any given Texinfo distribution could well be out |
| |
% of date, so if that's what you're using, please check. |
| |
% Texinfo has a small home page at http://texinfo.org/. |
| |
% |
| |
% Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org. Please include including a |
| |
% complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the |
| |
% problem. Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated. |
| |
% |
| |
% To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the |
| |
% texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution. For a simple |
| |
% manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this: |
| |
% tex foo.texi |
| |
% texindex foo.?? |
| |
% tex foo.texi |
| |
% tex foo.texi |
| |
% dvips foo.dvi -o # or whatever, to process the dvi file; this makes foo.ps. |
| |
% The extra runs of TeX get the cross-reference information correct. |
| |
% Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more |
| |
% than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary. |
| |
% |
| |
% It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages. You can get |
| |
% the existing language-specific files from ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/texinfo/. |
| |
|
| % This automatically updates the version number based on RCS. |
\message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:} |
| \def\deftexinfoversion$#1: #2 ${\def\texinfoversion{#2}} |
|
| \deftexinfoversion$Revision$ |
|
| \message{Loading texinfo package [Version \texinfoversion]:} |
|
| |
|
| % If in a .fmt file, print the version number |
% If in a .fmt file, print the version number |
| % and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because |
% and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because |
| % they might have appeared in the input file name. |
% they might have appeared in the input file name. |
| \everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}\message{} |
\everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}% |
| \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active} |
\catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active} |
| |
|
| % Save some parts of plain tex whose names we will redefine. |
% Save some parts of plain tex whose names we will redefine. |
| |
|
| \let\ptexb=\b |
\let\ptexb=\b |
| \let\ptexbullet=\bullet |
\let\ptexbullet=\bullet |
| \let\ptexc=\c |
\let\ptexc=\c |
|
Line 53
|
Line 74
|
| \let\ptexdot=\. |
\let\ptexdot=\. |
| \let\ptexdots=\dots |
\let\ptexdots=\dots |
| \let\ptexend=\end |
\let\ptexend=\end |
| \let\ptexequiv = \equiv |
\let\ptexequiv=\equiv |
| |
\let\ptexexclam=\! |
| \let\ptexi=\i |
\let\ptexi=\i |
| \let\ptexlbrace=\{ |
\let\ptexlbrace=\{ |
| \let\ptexrbrace=\} |
\let\ptexrbrace=\} |
| \let\ptexstar=\* |
\let\ptexstar=\* |
| \let\ptext=\t |
\let\ptext=\t |
| \let\ptextilde=\~ |
|
| |
|
| % Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space |
|
| % equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space |
|
| % at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and |
|
| % since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the |
|
| % penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph. |
|
| {\catcode`@ = 11 |
|
| % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble |
|
| % if the definition is written into an index file. |
|
| \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M |
|
| \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ } |
|
| } |
|
| \let\~ = \tie % And make it available as @~. |
|
| |
|
| |
% We never want plain's outer \+ definition in Texinfo. |
| |
% For @tex, we can use \tabalign. |
| |
\let\+ = \relax |
| |
|
| \message{Basics,} |
\message{Basics,} |
| \chardef\other=12 |
\chardef\other=12 |
|
Line 82
|
Line 93
|
| % starts a new line in the output. |
% starts a new line in the output. |
| \newlinechar = `^^J |
\newlinechar = `^^J |
| |
|
| % Set up fixed words for English. |
% Set up fixed words for English if not already set. |
| \ifx\putwordChapter\undefined{\gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}}\fi% |
\ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi |
| \def\putwordInfo{Info}% |
\ifx\putwordChapter\undefined \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi |
| \ifx\putwordSee\undefined{\gdef\putwordSee{See}}\fi% |
\ifx\putwordfile\undefined \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi |
| \ifx\putwordsee\undefined{\gdef\putwordsee{see}}\fi% |
\ifx\putwordin\undefined \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi |
| \ifx\putwordfile\undefined{\gdef\putwordfile{file}}\fi% |
\ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi |
| \ifx\putwordpage\undefined{\gdef\putwordpage{page}}\fi% |
\ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi |
| \ifx\putwordsection\undefined{\gdef\putwordsection{section}}\fi% |
\ifx\putwordInfo\undefined \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi |
| \ifx\putwordSection\undefined{\gdef\putwordSection{Section}}\fi% |
\ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi |
| \ifx\putwordTableofContents\undefined{\gdef\putwordTableofContents{Table of Contents}}\fi% |
\ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi |
| \ifx\putwordShortContents\undefined{\gdef\putwordShortContents{Short Contents}}\fi% |
\ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi |
| \ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined{\gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}}\fi% |
\ifx\putwordof\undefined \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi |
| |
\ifx\putwordon\undefined \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi |
| |
\ifx\putwordpage\undefined \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi |
| |
\ifx\putwordsection\undefined \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi |
| |
\ifx\putwordSection\undefined \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi |
| |
\ifx\putwordsee\undefined \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi |
| |
\ifx\putwordSee\undefined \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi |
| |
\ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi |
| |
\ifx\putwordTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi |
| |
% |
| |
\ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi |
| |
\ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi |
| |
\ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi |
| |
\ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi |
| |
\ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi |
| |
\ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi |
| |
\ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi |
| |
\ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi |
| |
\ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi |
| |
\ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi |
| |
\ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi |
| |
\ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi |
| |
% |
| |
\ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi |
| |
\ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi |
| |
\ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi |
| |
\ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi |
| |
\ifx\putwordDeftypevar\undefined\gdef\putwordDeftypevar{Variable}\fi |
| |
\ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi |
| |
\ifx\putwordDeftypefun\undefined\gdef\putwordDeftypefun{Function}\fi |
| |
|
| % Ignore a token. |
% Ignore a token. |
| % |
% |
|
Line 102
|
Line 142
|
| \hyphenation{ap-pen-dix} |
\hyphenation{ap-pen-dix} |
| \hyphenation{mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers} |
\hyphenation{mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers} |
| \hyphenation{eshell} |
\hyphenation{eshell} |
| |
\hyphenation{white-space} |
| |
|
| % Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages. |
% Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages. |
| \newdimen \bindingoffset |
\newdimen \bindingoffset |
| \newdimen \normaloffset |
\newdimen \normaloffset |
| \newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight |
\newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight |
| |
|
| % Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file |
% Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file |
|
Line 113
|
Line 154
|
| % since that produces some useless output on the terminal. |
% since that produces some useless output on the terminal. |
| % |
% |
| \def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}% |
\def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}% |
| |
\ifx\eTeXversion\undefined |
| \def\loggingall{\tracingcommands2 \tracingstats2 |
\def\loggingall{\tracingcommands2 \tracingstats2 |
| \tracingpages1 \tracingoutput1 \tracinglostchars1 |
\tracingpages1 \tracingoutput1 \tracinglostchars1 |
| \tracingmacros2 \tracingparagraphs1 \tracingrestores1 |
\tracingmacros2 \tracingparagraphs1 \tracingrestores1 |
| \showboxbreadth\maxdimen\showboxdepth\maxdimen |
\showboxbreadth\maxdimen\showboxdepth\maxdimen |
| }% |
}% |
| |
\else |
| |
\def\loggingall{\tracingcommands3 \tracingstats2 |
| |
\tracingpages1 \tracingoutput1 \tracinglostchars1 |
| |
\tracingmacros2 \tracingparagraphs1 \tracingrestores1 |
| |
\tracingscantokens1 \tracingassigns1 \tracingifs1 |
| |
\tracinggroups1 \tracingnesting2 |
| |
\showboxbreadth\maxdimen\showboxdepth\maxdimen |
| |
}% |
| |
\fi |
| |
|
| %---------------------Begin change----------------------- |
% For @cropmarks command. |
| |
% Do @cropmarks to get crop marks. |
| % |
% |
| %%%% For @cropmarks command. |
\newif\ifcropmarks |
| % Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986 |
\let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue |
| % |
% |
| \newdimen\cornerlong \newdimen\cornerthick |
% Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners. |
| \newdimen \topandbottommargin |
% Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986 |
| \newdimen \outerhsize \newdimen \outervsize |
|
| \cornerlong=1pc\cornerthick=.3pt % These set size of cropmarks |
|
| \outerhsize=7in |
|
| %\outervsize=9.5in |
|
| % Alternative @smallbook page size is 9.25in |
|
| \outervsize=9.25in |
|
| \topandbottommargin=.75in |
|
| % |
% |
| %---------------------End change----------------------- |
\newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines |
| |
\newdimen\cornerlong \cornerlong=1pc |
| |
\newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt |
| |
\newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in |
| |
|
| |
% Main output routine. |
| |
\chardef\PAGE = 255 |
| |
\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}} |
| |
|
| |
\newbox\headlinebox |
| |
\newbox\footlinebox |
| |
|
| % \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument. Note that \pagecontents |
% \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument. Note that \pagecontents |
| % does insertions, but you have to call it yourself. |
% does insertions, but you have to call it yourself. |
| \chardef\PAGE=255 \output={\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}} |
|
| \def\onepageout#1{% |
\def\onepageout#1{% |
| \hoffset=\normaloffset |
\ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi |
| |
% |
| \ifodd\pageno \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset |
\ifodd\pageno \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset |
| \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi |
\else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi |
| |
% |
| |
% Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in |
| |
% the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code). |
| |
\setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline}% |
| |
\setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}% |
| |
% |
| {% |
{% |
| \escapechar = `\\ % use backslash in output files. |
% Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to |
| \indexdummies |
% take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends |
| |
% before the \shipout runs. |
| |
% |
| |
\escapechar = `\\ % use backslash in output files. |
| |
\indexdummies % don't expand commands in the output. |
| |
\normalturnoffactive % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if |
| |
% the page break happens to be in the middle of an example. |
| \shipout\vbox{% |
\shipout\vbox{% |
| {\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline}% |
\ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup |
| |
\hsize = \outerhsize |
| |
\vskip-\topandbottommargin |
| |
\vtop to0pt{% |
| |
\line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}% |
| |
\nointerlineskip |
| |
\line{% |
| |
\vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}% |
| |
\hfill |
| |
\vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}% |
| |
}% |
| |
\vss}% |
| |
\vskip\topandbottommargin |
| |
\line\bgroup |
| |
\hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize. |
| |
\ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi |
| |
\vbox\bgroup |
| |
\fi |
| |
% |
| |
\unvbox\headlinebox |
| \pagebody{#1}% |
\pagebody{#1}% |
| {\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}% |
\ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt |
| }% |
% Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty. |
| }% |
% (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingxxx.) |
| |
% The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect. |
| |
\vskip 2\baselineskip |
| |
\unvbox\footlinebox |
| |
\fi |
| |
% |
| |
\ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfmkdest{\the\pageno} \fi |
| |
% |
| |
\ifcropmarks |
| |
\egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup |
| |
\hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup |
| |
\vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill |
| |
\boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick |
| |
\vbox to0pt{\vss |
| |
\line{% |
| |
\vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}% |
| |
\hfill |
| |
\vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}% |
| |
}% |
| |
\nointerlineskip |
| |
\line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}% |
| |
}% |
| |
\egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause |
| |
\fi |
| |
}% end of \shipout\vbox |
| |
}% end of group with \turnoffactive |
| \advancepageno |
\advancepageno |
| \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi |
\ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi |
| } |
} |
| |
|
| %%%% For @cropmarks command %%%% |
|
| |
|
| % Here is a modification of the main output routine for Near East Publications |
|
| % This provides right-angle cropmarks at all four corners. |
|
| % The contents of the page are centerlined into the cropmarks, |
|
| % and any desired binding offset is added as an \hskip on either |
|
| % site of the centerlined box. (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986) |
|
| % |
|
| \def\croppageout#1{\hoffset=0pt % make sure this doesn't mess things up |
|
| {\escapechar=`\\\relax % makes sure backslash is used in output files. |
|
| \shipout |
|
| \vbox to \outervsize{\hsize=\outerhsize |
|
| \vbox{\line{\ewtop\hfill\ewtop}} |
|
| \nointerlineskip |
|
| \line{\vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop} |
|
| \hfill |
|
| \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}} |
|
| \vskip \topandbottommargin |
|
| \centerline{\ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi |
|
| \vbox{ |
|
| {\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline} |
|
| \pagebody{#1} |
|
| {\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}} |
|
| \ifodd\pageno\else\hskip\bindingoffset\fi} |
|
| \vskip \topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill |
|
| \boxmaxdepth\cornerthick |
|
| \line{\vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot} |
|
| \hfill |
|
| \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}} |
|
| \nointerlineskip |
|
| \vbox{\line{\ewbot\hfill\ewbot}} |
|
| }} |
|
| \advancepageno |
|
| \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi} |
|
| % |
|
| % Do @cropmarks to get crop marks |
|
| \def\cropmarks{\let\onepageout=\croppageout } |
|
| |
|
| \newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen |
\newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen |
| |
|
| \def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}} |
\def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}} |
|
Line 207
|
Line 280
|
| \ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi} |
\ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi} |
| } |
} |
| |
|
| % |
|
| % Here are the rules for the cropmarks. Note that they are |
% Here are the rules for the cropmarks. Note that they are |
| % offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize |
% offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize |
| % (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986) |
% (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986) |
|
Line 302
|
Line 374
|
| %% Call \inENV within environments (after a \begingroup) |
%% Call \inENV within environments (after a \begingroup) |
| \newif\ifENV \ENVfalse \def\inENV{\ifENV\relax\else\ENVtrue\fi} |
\newif\ifENV \ENVfalse \def\inENV{\ifENV\relax\else\ENVtrue\fi} |
| \def\ENVcheck{% |
\def\ENVcheck{% |
| \ifENV\errmessage{Still within an environment. Type Return to continue.} |
\ifENV\errmessage{Still within an environment; press RETURN to continue} |
| \endgroup\fi} % This is not perfect, but it should reduce lossage |
\endgroup\fi} % This is not perfect, but it should reduce lossage |
| |
|
| % @begin foo is the same as @foo, for now. |
% @begin foo is the same as @foo, for now. |
| \newhelp\EMsimple{Type <Return> to continue.} |
\newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.} |
| |
|
| \outer\def\begin{\parsearg\beginxxx} |
\outer\def\begin{\parsearg\beginxxx} |
| |
|
|
Line 365
|
Line 437
|
| |
|
| % @@ prints an @ |
% @@ prints an @ |
| % Kludge this until the fonts are right (grr). |
% Kludge this until the fonts are right (grr). |
| \def\@{{\tt \char '100}} |
\def\@{{\tt\char64}} |
| |
|
| % This is turned off because it was never documented |
% This is turned off because it was never documented |
| % and you can use @w{...} around a quote to suppress ligatures. |
% and you can use @w{...} around a quote to suppress ligatures. |
|
Line 375
|
Line 447
|
| %\def\'{{'}} |
%\def\'{{'}} |
| |
|
| % Used to generate quoted braces. |
% Used to generate quoted braces. |
| \def\mylbrace {{\tt \char '173}} |
\def\mylbrace {{\tt\char123}} |
| \def\myrbrace {{\tt \char '175}} |
\def\myrbrace {{\tt\char125}} |
| \let\{=\mylbrace |
\let\{=\mylbrace |
| \let\}=\myrbrace |
\let\}=\myrbrace |
| \begingroup |
\begingroup |
|
Line 413
|
Line 485
|
| \fi\fi |
\fi\fi |
| } |
} |
| |
|
| |
% Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space |
| |
% equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space |
| |
% at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and |
| |
% since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the |
| |
% penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph. |
| |
{\catcode`@ = 11 |
| |
% Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble |
| |
% if the definition is written into an index file. |
| |
\global\let\tiepenalty = \@M |
| |
\gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ } |
| |
} |
| |
|
| % @: forces normal size whitespace following. |
% @: forces normal size whitespace following. |
| \def\:{\spacefactor=1000 } |
\def\:{\spacefactor=1000 } |
| |
|
|
Line 422
|
Line 506
|
| % @. is an end-of-sentence period. |
% @. is an end-of-sentence period. |
| \def\.{.\spacefactor=3000 } |
\def\.{.\spacefactor=3000 } |
| |
|
| % @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis. |
|
| \gdef\enddots{$\mathinner{\ldotp\ldotp\ldotp\ldotp}$\spacefactor=3000} |
|
| |
|
| % @! is an end-of-sentence bang. |
% @! is an end-of-sentence bang. |
| \gdef\!{!\spacefactor=3000 } |
\def\!{!\spacefactor=3000 } |
| |
|
| % @? is an end-of-sentence query. |
% @? is an end-of-sentence query. |
| \gdef\?{?\spacefactor=3000 } |
\def\?{?\spacefactor=3000 } |
| |
|
| % @w prevents a word break. Without the \leavevmode, @w at the |
% @w prevents a word break. Without the \leavevmode, @w at the |
| % beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would |
% beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would |
|
Line 513 where each line of input produces a line
|
Line 594 where each line of input produces a line
|
| %% This method tries to make TeX break the page naturally |
%% This method tries to make TeX break the page naturally |
| %% if the depth of the box does not fit. |
%% if the depth of the box does not fit. |
| %{\baselineskip=0pt% |
%{\baselineskip=0pt% |
| %\vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}\kern -#1\mil\penalty 10000 |
%\vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}\kern -#1\mil\nobreak |
| %\prevdepth=-1000pt |
%\prevdepth=-1000pt |
| %}} |
%}} |
| |
|
| \def\needx#1{% |
\def\needx#1{% |
| % Go into vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a |
% Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a |
| % paragraph. |
% paragraph. |
| \par |
\par |
| % |
% |
| % Don't add any leading before our big empty box, but allow a page |
% If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless. |
| % break, since the best break might be right here. |
\dimen0 = #1\mil |
| \allowbreak |
\dimen2 = \ht\strutbox |
| \nointerlineskip |
\advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox |
| \vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}% |
\ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2 |
| % |
% |
| % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the |
% Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the |
| % main vertical list is 10000 or more. But in order to see if the |
% normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line. |
| % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider |
% And a page break here is fine. |
| % page breaks. On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the |
\vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}% |
| % page after the empty box. So we use a penalty of 9999. |
% |
| % |
% TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the |
| % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the |
% main vertical list is 10000 or more. But in order to see if the |
| % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in |
% empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider |
| % sight. (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which |
% page breaks. On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the |
| % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing |
% page after the empty box. So we use a penalty of 9999. |
| % good page breaking, for example.) However, I could not construct an |
% |
| % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real |
% There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the |
| % document, then we can reconsider our strategy. |
% page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in |
| \penalty9999 |
% sight. (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which |
| % |
% almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing |
| % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not. |
% good page breaking, for example.) However, I could not construct an |
| \kern -#1\mil |
% example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real |
| % |
% document, then we can reconsider our strategy. |
| % Do not allow a page break right after this kern. |
\penalty9999 |
| \nobreak |
% |
| |
% Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not. |
| |
\kern -#1\mil |
| |
% |
| |
% Do not allow a page break right after this kern. |
| |
\nobreak |
| |
\fi |
| } |
} |
| |
|
| % @br forces paragraph break |
% @br forces paragraph break |
| |
|
| \let\br = \par |
\let\br = \par |
| |
|
| % @dots{} output some dots |
% @dots{} output an ellipsis using the current font. |
| |
% We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in a typewriter |
| |
% font as three actual period characters. |
| |
% |
| |
\def\dots{% |
| |
\leavevmode |
| |
\hbox to 1.5em{% |
| |
\hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil minus 0.25fil |
| |
.\hss.\hss.% |
| |
\hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil minus 0.5fil |
| |
}% |
| |
} |
| |
|
| |
% @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis. |
| |
% |
| |
\def\enddots{% |
| |
\leavevmode |
| |
\hbox to 2em{% |
| |
\hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil minus 0.25fil |
| |
.\hss.\hss.\hss.% |
| |
\hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil minus 0.5fil |
| |
}% |
| |
\spacefactor=3000 |
| |
} |
| |
|
| \def\dots{$\ldots$} |
|
| |
|
| % @page forces the start of a new page |
% @page forces the start of a new page |
| |
% |
| \def\page{\par\vfill\supereject} |
\def\page{\par\vfill\supereject} |
| |
|
| % @exdent text.... |
% @exdent text.... |
|
Line 626 where each line of input produces a line
|
Line 735 where each line of input produces a line
|
| % @c is the same as @comment |
% @c is the same as @comment |
| % @ignore ... @end ignore is another way to write a comment |
% @ignore ... @end ignore is another way to write a comment |
| |
|
| \def\comment{\catcode 64=\other \catcode 123=\other \catcode 125=\other% |
\def\comment{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\other% |
| \parsearg \commentxxx} |
\catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other% |
| |
\commentxxx} |
| \def\commentxxx #1{\catcode 64=0 \catcode 123=1 \catcode 125=2 } |
{\catcode`\^^M=\other \gdef\commentxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}} |
| |
|
| \let\c=\comment |
\let\c=\comment |
| |
|
| % @paragraphindent is defined for the Info formatting commands only. |
% @paragraphindent NCHARS |
| \let\paragraphindent=\comment |
% We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough. |
| |
% We cannot implement @paragraphindent asis, though. |
| % Prevent errors for section commands. |
% |
| % Used in @ignore and in failing conditionals. |
\def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords |
| \def\ignoresections{% |
\def\noneword{none} |
| \let\chapter=\relax |
% |
| \let\unnumbered=\relax |
\def\paragraphindent{\parsearg\doparagraphindent} |
| \let\top=\relax |
\def\doparagraphindent#1{% |
| \let\unnumberedsec=\relax |
\def\temp{#1}% |
| \let\unnumberedsection=\relax |
\ifx\temp\asisword |
| \let\unnumberedsubsec=\relax |
\else |
| \let\unnumberedsubsection=\relax |
\ifx\temp\noneword |
| \let\unnumberedsubsubsec=\relax |
\defaultparindent = 0pt |
| \let\unnumberedsubsubsection=\relax |
\else |
| \let\section=\relax |
\defaultparindent = #1em |
| \let\subsec=\relax |
\fi |
| \let\subsubsec=\relax |
\fi |
| \let\subsection=\relax |
\parindent = \defaultparindent |
| \let\subsubsection=\relax |
|
| \let\appendix=\relax |
|
| \let\appendixsec=\relax |
|
| \let\appendixsection=\relax |
|
| \let\appendixsubsec=\relax |
|
| \let\appendixsubsection=\relax |
|
| \let\appendixsubsubsec=\relax |
|
| \let\appendixsubsubsection=\relax |
|
| \let\contents=\relax |
|
| \let\smallbook=\relax |
|
| \let\titlepage=\relax |
|
| } |
} |
| |
|
| % Used in nested conditionals, where we have to parse the Texinfo source |
% @exampleindent NCHARS |
| % and so want to turn off most commands, in case they are used |
% We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent. |
| % incorrectly. |
% It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but |
| % |
% I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent. |
| \def\ignoremorecommands{% |
\def\exampleindent{\parsearg\doexampleindent} |
| \let\defcodeindex = \relax |
\def\doexampleindent#1{% |
| \let\defcv = \relax |
\def\temp{#1}% |
| \let\deffn = \relax |
\ifx\temp\asisword |
| \let\deffnx = \relax |
\else |
| \let\defindex = \relax |
\ifx\temp\noneword |
| \let\defivar = \relax |
\lispnarrowing = 0pt |
| \let\defmac = \relax |
\else |
| \let\defmethod = \relax |
\lispnarrowing = #1em |
| \let\defop = \relax |
\fi |
| \let\defopt = \relax |
\fi |
| \let\defspec = \relax |
|
| \let\deftp = \relax |
|
| \let\deftypefn = \relax |
|
| \let\deftypefun = \relax |
|
| \let\deftypevar = \relax |
|
| \let\deftypevr = \relax |
|
| \let\defun = \relax |
|
| \let\defvar = \relax |
|
| \let\defvr = \relax |
|
| \let\ref = \relax |
|
| \let\xref = \relax |
|
| \let\printindex = \relax |
|
| \let\pxref = \relax |
|
| \let\settitle = \relax |
|
| \let\setchapternewpage = \relax |
|
| \let\setchapterstyle = \relax |
|
| \let\everyheading = \relax |
|
| \let\evenheading = \relax |
|
| \let\oddheading = \relax |
|
| \let\everyfooting = \relax |
|
| \let\evenfooting = \relax |
|
| \let\oddfooting = \relax |
|
| \let\headings = \relax |
|
| \let\include = \relax |
|
| \let\lowersections = \relax |
|
| \let\down = \relax |
|
| \let\raisesections = \relax |
|
| \let\up = \relax |
|
| \let\set = \relax |
|
| \let\clear = \relax |
|
| \let\item = \relax |
|
| } |
} |
| |
|
| % Ignore @ignore ... @end ignore. |
% @asis just yields its argument. Used with @table, for example. |
| % |
% |
| \def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}} |
\def\asis#1{#1} |
| |
|
| % Also ignore @ifinfo, @ifhtml, @html, @menu, and @direntry text. |
% @math means output in math mode. |
| |
% We don't use $'s directly in the definition of \math because control |
| |
% sequences like \math are expanded when the toc file is written. Then, |
| |
% we read the toc file back, the $'s will be normal characters (as they |
| |
% should be, according to the definition of Texinfo). So we must use a |
| |
% control sequence to switch into and out of math mode. |
| % |
% |
| \def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}} |
% This isn't quite enough for @math to work properly in indices, but it |
| \def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}} |
% seems unlikely it will ever be needed there. |
| \def\html{\doignore{html}} |
% |
| \def\menu{\doignore{menu}} |
\let\implicitmath = $ |
| \def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}} |
\def\math#1{\implicitmath #1\implicitmath} |
| |
|
| % Also ignore @macro ... @end macro. The user must run texi2dvi, |
|
| % which runs makeinfo to do macro expansion. Ignore @unmacro, too. |
|
| \def\macro{\doignore{macro}} |
|
| \let\unmacro = \comment |
|
| |
|
| |
% @bullet and @minus need the same treatment as @math, just above. |
| |
\def\bullet{\implicitmath\ptexbullet\implicitmath} |
| |
\def\minus{\implicitmath-\implicitmath} |
| |
|
| % @dircategory CATEGORY -- specify a category of the dir file |
% @refill is a no-op. |
| % which this file should belong to. Ignore this in TeX. |
\let\refill=\relax |
| \let\dircategory = \comment |
|
| |
|
| % Ignore text until a line `@end #1'. |
% If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to |
| |
% be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs. |
| |
% This is done with @novalidate (before @setfilename). |
| % |
% |
| \def\doignore#1{\begingroup |
\newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files. |
| % Don't complain about control sequences we have declared \outer. |
\let\novalidate = \linksfalse |
| \ignoresections |
|
| % |
% @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file. |
| % Define a command to swallow text until we reach `@end #1'. |
% So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input. |
| \long\def\doignoretext##1\end #1{\enddoignore}% |
% This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo. |
| % |
\def\setfilename{% |
| % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants. |
\iflinks |
| \catcode32 = 10 |
\readauxfile |
| % |
\fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case. |
| % And now expand that command. |
\openindices |
| \doignoretext |
\fixbackslash % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'. |
| |
\global\let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds. |
| |
% |
| |
% If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it. |
| |
% Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc. |
| |
% Just to be on the safe side, close the input stream before the \input. |
| |
\openin 1 texinfo.cnf |
| |
\ifeof1 \let\temp=\relax \else \def\temp{\input texinfo.cnf }\fi |
| |
\closein1 |
| |
\temp |
| |
% |
| |
\comment % Ignore the actual filename. |
| } |
} |
| |
|
| % What we do to finish off ignored text. |
% Called from \setfilename. |
| % |
% |
| \def\enddoignore{\endgroup\ignorespaces}% |
\def\openindices{% |
| |
\newindex{cp}% |
| |
\newcodeindex{fn}% |
| |
\newcodeindex{vr}% |
| |
\newcodeindex{tp}% |
| |
\newcodeindex{ky}% |
| |
\newcodeindex{pg}% |
| |
} |
| |
|
| \newif\ifwarnedobs\warnedobsfalse |
% @bye. |
| \def\obstexwarn{% |
\outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend} |
| \ifwarnedobs\relax\else |
|
| % We need to warn folks that they may have trouble with TeX 3.0. |
|
| % This uses \immediate\write16 rather than \message to get newlines. |
\message{pdf,} |
| \immediate\write16{} |
% adobe `portable' document format |
| \immediate\write16{***WARNING*** for users of Unix TeX 3.0!} |
\newcount\tempnum |
| \immediate\write16{This manual trips a bug in TeX version 3.0 (tex hangs).} |
\newcount\lnkcount |
| \immediate\write16{If you are running another version of TeX, relax.} |
\newtoks\filename |
| \immediate\write16{If you are running Unix TeX 3.0, kill this TeX process.} |
\newcount\filenamelength |
| \immediate\write16{ Then upgrade your TeX installation if you can.} |
\newcount\pgn |
| \immediate\write16{ (See ftp://ftp.gnu.ai.mit.edu/pub/gnu/TeX.README.)} |
\newtoks\toksA |
| \immediate\write16{If you are stuck with version 3.0, run the} |
\newtoks\toksB |
| \immediate\write16{ script ``tex3patch'' from the Texinfo distribution} |
\newtoks\toksC |
| \immediate\write16{ to use a workaround.} |
\newtoks\toksD |
| \immediate\write16{} |
\newbox\boxA |
| \global\warnedobstrue |
\newcount\countA |
| |
\newif\ifpdf |
| |
\newif\ifpdfmakepagedest |
| |
|
| |
\ifx\pdfoutput\undefined |
| |
\pdffalse |
| |
\let\pdfmkdest = \gobble |
| |
\let\pdfurl = \gobble |
| |
\let\endlink = \relax |
| |
\let\linkcolor = \relax |
| |
\let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax |
| |
\else |
| |
\pdftrue |
| |
\pdfoutput = 1 |
| |
\input pdfcolor |
| |
\def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{% |
| |
\def\imagewidth{#2}% |
| |
\def\imageheight{#3}% |
| |
\ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 |
| |
\pdfimage |
| |
\else |
| |
\pdfximage |
| \fi |
\fi |
| } |
\ifx\empty\imagewidth\else width \imagewidth \fi |
| |
\ifx\empty\imageheight\else height \imageheight \fi |
| % **In TeX 3.0, setting text in \nullfont hangs tex. For a |
{#1.pdf}% |
| % workaround (which requires the file ``dummy.tfm'' to be installed), |
\ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else |
| % uncomment the following line: |
\pdfrefximage \pdflastximage |
| %%%%%\font\nullfont=dummy\let\obstexwarn=\relax |
\fi} |
| |
\def\pdfmkdest#1{\pdfdest name{#1@} xyz} |
| % Ignore text, except that we keep track of conditional commands for |
\def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1@} |
| % purposes of nesting, up to an `@end #1' command. |
\let\linkcolor = \Cyan |
| % |
\def\endlink{\Black\pdfendlink} |
| \def\nestedignore#1{% |
% Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines |
| \obstexwarn |
% come from Petr Olsak |
| % We must actually expand the ignored text to look for the @end |
\def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0% |
| % command, so that nested ignore constructs work. Thus, we put the |
\else \csname#1\endcsname \fi} |
| % text into a \vbox and then do nothing with the result. To minimize |
\def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax |
| % the change of memory overflow, we follow the approach outlined on |
\advance\tempnum by1 |
| % page 401 of the TeXbook: make the current font be a dummy font. |
\expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}} |
| % |
\def\pdfmakeoutlines{{% |
| \setbox0 = \vbox\bgroup |
\openin 1 \jobname.toc |
| % Don't complain about control sequences we have declared \outer. |
\ifeof 1\else\bgroup |
| \ignoresections |
\closein 1 |
| % |
\indexnofonts |
| % Define `@end #1' to end the box, which will in turn undefine the |
\def\tt{} |
| % @end command again. |
% thanh's hack / proper braces in bookmarks |
| \expandafter\def\csname E#1\endcsname{\egroup\ignorespaces}% |
\edef\mylbrace{\iftrue \string{\else}\fi}\let\{=\mylbrace |
| % |
\edef\myrbrace{\iffalse{\else\string}\fi}\let\}=\myrbrace |
| % We are going to be parsing Texinfo commands. Most cause no |
% |
| % trouble when they are used incorrectly, but some commands do |
\def\chapentry ##1##2##3{} |
| % complicated argument parsing or otherwise get confused, so we |
\def\unnumbchapentry ##1##2{} |
| % undefine them. |
\def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{\advancenumber{chap##2}} |
| % |
\def\unnumbsecentry ##1##2{} |
| % We can't do anything about stray @-signs, unfortunately; |
\def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{\advancenumber{sec##2.##3}} |
| % they'll produce `undefined control sequence' errors. |
\def\unnumbsubsecentry ##1##2{} |
| \ignoremorecommands |
\def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{\advancenumber{subsec##2.##3.##4}} |
| % |
\def\unnumbsubsubsecentry ##1##2{} |
| % Set the current font to be \nullfont, a TeX primitive, and define |
\input \jobname.toc |
| % all the font commands to also use \nullfont. We don't use |
\def\chapentry ##1##2##3{% |
| % dummy.tfm, as suggested in the TeXbook, because not all sites |
\pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##3}}count-\expnumber{chap##2}{##1}} |
| % might have that installed. Therefore, math mode will still |
\def\unnumbchapentry ##1##2{% |
| % produce output, but that should be an extremely small amount of |
\pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##2}}{##1}} |
| % stuff compared to the main input. |
\def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{% |
| % |
\pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##4}}count-\expnumber{sec##2.##3}{##1}} |
| \nullfont |
\def\unnumbsecentry ##1##2{% |
| \let\tenrm = \nullfont \let\tenit = \nullfont \let\tensl = \nullfont |
\pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##2}}{##1}} |
| \let\tenbf = \nullfont \let\tentt = \nullfont \let\smallcaps = \nullfont |
\def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{% |
| \let\tensf = \nullfont |
\pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##5}}count-\expnumber{subsec##2.##3.##4}{##1}} |
| % Similarly for index fonts (mostly for their use in |
\def\unnumbsubsecentry ##1##2{% |
| % smallexample) |
\pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##2}}{##1}} |
| \let\indrm = \nullfont \let\indit = \nullfont \let\indsl = \nullfont |
\def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{% |
| \let\indbf = \nullfont \let\indtt = \nullfont \let\indsc = \nullfont |
\pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##6}}{##1}} |
| \let\indsf = \nullfont |
\def\unnumbsubsubsecentry ##1##2{% |
| % |
\pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##2}}{##1}} |
| % Don't complain when characters are missing from the fonts. |
\input \jobname.toc |
| \tracinglostchars = 0 |
\egroup\fi |
| % |
}} |
| % Don't bother to do space factor calculations. |
\def\makelinks #1,{% |
| \frenchspacing |
\def\params{#1}\def\E{END}% |
| % |
\ifx\params\E |
| % Don't report underfull hboxes. |
\let\nextmakelinks=\relax |
| \hbadness = 10000 |
\else |
| % |
\let\nextmakelinks=\makelinks |
| % Do minimal line-breaking. |
\ifnum\lnkcount>0,\fi |
| \pretolerance = 10000 |
\picknum{#1}% |
| % |
\startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} |
| % Do not execute instructions in @tex |
goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\the\pgn}}% |
| \def\tex{\doignore{tex}} |
\linkcolor #1% |
| } |
\advance\lnkcount by 1% |
| |
\endlink |
| % @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value. |
\fi |
| % @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE. |
\nextmakelinks |
| % |
} |
| % Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be |
\def\picknum#1{\expandafter\pn#1} |
| % empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our |
\def\pn#1{% |
| % own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we |
\def\p{#1}% |
| % didn't need it. Make sure the catcode of space is correct to avoid |
\ifx\p\lbrace |
| % losing inside @example, for instance. |
\let\nextpn=\ppn |
| % |
\else |
| \def\set{\begingroup\catcode` =10 \parsearg\setxxx} |
\let\nextpn=\ppnn |
| \def\setxxx#1{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy} |
\def\first{#1} |
| \def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{% |
\fi |
| \def\temp{#2}% |
\nextpn |
| \ifx\temp\empty \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname = \empty |
} |
| \else \setzzz{#1}#2\endsetzzz % Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted. |
\def\ppn#1{\pgn=#1\gobble} |
| \fi |
\def\ppnn{\pgn=\first} |
| \endgroup |
\def\pdfmklnk#1{\lnkcount=0\makelinks #1,END,} |
| } |
\def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks} |
| % Can't use \xdef to pre-expand #2 and save some time, since \temp or |
\def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}% |
| % \next or other control sequences that we've defined might get us into |
\ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax |
| % an infinite loop. Consider `@set foo @cite{bar}'. |
\else\let\nextsp\skipspaces |
| \def\setzzz#1#2 \endsetzzz{\expandafter\gdef\csname SET#1\endcsname{#2}} |
\ifx\p\space\else\addtokens{\filename}{\PP}% |
| |
\advance\filenamelength by 1 |
| % @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR. |
\fi |
| % |
\fi |
| \def\clear{\parsearg\clearxxx} |
\nextsp} |
| \def\clearxxx#1{\global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax} |
\def\getfilename#1{\filenamelength=0\expandafter\skipspaces#1|\relax} |
| |
\ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 |
| % @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo. |
\let \startlink \pdfannotlink |
| % |
\else |
| \def\value#1{\expandafter |
\let \startlink \pdfstartlink |
| \ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax |
\fi |
| {\{No value for ``#1''\}} |
\def\pdfurl#1{% |
| \else \csname SET#1\endcsname \fi} |
\begingroup |
| |
\normalturnoffactive\def\@{@}% |
| % @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined |
\leavevmode\Red |
| % with @set. |
\startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% |
| % |
user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}% |
| \def\ifset{\parsearg\ifsetxxx} |
% #1 |
| \def\ifsetxxx #1{% |
\endgroup} |
| \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax |
\def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}} |
| \expandafter\ifsetfail |
\def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks} |
| \else |
\def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks} |
| \expandafter\ifsetsucceed |
\def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}} |
| \fi |
\def\maketoks{% |
| } |
\expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS| |
| \def\ifsetsucceed{\conditionalsucceed{ifset}} |
\ifx\first0\adn0 |
| \def\ifsetfail{\nestedignore{ifset}} |
\else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3 |
| \defineunmatchedend{ifset} |
\else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6 |
| |
\else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9 |
| % @ifclear VAR ... @end ifclear reads the `...' iff VAR has never been |
\else |
| % defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear. |
\ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi |
| % |
\ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else |
| \def\ifclear{\parsearg\ifclearxxx} |
\let\next=\maketoks |
| \def\ifclearxxx #1{% |
\addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD} |
| \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax |
\ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi |
| \expandafter\ifclearsucceed |
\fi |
| \else |
\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi |
| \expandafter\ifclearfail |
\next} |
| \fi |
\def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}% |
| } |
{\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0} |
| \def\ifclearsucceed{\conditionalsucceed{ifclear}} |
\def\pdflink#1{% |
| \def\ifclearfail{\nestedignore{ifclear}} |
\startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\mkpgn{#1}} |
| \defineunmatchedend{ifclear} |
\linkcolor #1\endlink} |
| |
\def\mkpgn#1{#1@} |
| % @iftex always succeeds; we read the text following, through @end |
\def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st} |
| % iftex). But `@end iftex' should be valid only after an @iftex. |
\fi % \ifx\pdfoutput |
| % |
|
| \def\iftex{\conditionalsucceed{iftex}} |
|
| \defineunmatchedend{iftex} |
|
| |
|
| % We can't just want to start a group at @iftex (for example) and end it |
|
| % at @end iftex, since then @set commands inside the conditional have no |
|
| % effect (they'd get reverted at the end of the group). So we must |
|
| % define \Eiftex to redefine itself to be its previous value. (We can't |
|
| % just define it to fail again with an ``unmatched end'' error, since |
|
| % the @ifset might be nested.) |
|
| % |
|
| \def\conditionalsucceed#1{% |
|
| \edef\temp{% |
|
| % Remember the current value of \E#1. |
|
| \let\nece{prevE#1} = \nece{E#1}% |
|
| % |
|
| % At the `@end #1', redefine \E#1 to be its previous value. |
|
| \def\nece{E#1}{\let\nece{E#1} = \nece{prevE#1}}% |
|
| }% |
|
| \temp |
|
| } |
|
| |
|
| % We need to expand lots of \csname's, but we don't want to expand the |
|
| % control sequences after we've constructed them. |
|
| % |
|
| \def\nece#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname} |
|
| |
|
| % @asis just yields its argument. Used with @table, for example. |
|
| % |
|
| \def\asis#1{#1} |
|
| |
|
| % @math means output in math mode. |
|
| % We don't use $'s directly in the definition of \math because control |
|
| % sequences like \math are expanded when the toc file is written. Then, |
|
| % we read the toc file back, the $'s will be normal characters (as they |
|
| % should be, according to the definition of Texinfo). So we must use a |
|
| % control sequence to switch into and out of math mode. |
|
| % |
|
| % This isn't quite enough for @math to work properly in indices, but it |
|
| % seems unlikely it will ever be needed there. |
|
| % |
|
| \let\implicitmath = $ |
|
| \def\math#1{\implicitmath #1\implicitmath} |
|
| |
|
| % @bullet and @minus need the same treatment as @math, just above. |
|
| \def\bullet{\implicitmath\ptexbullet\implicitmath} |
|
| \def\minus{\implicitmath-\implicitmath} |
|
| |
|
| \def\node{\ENVcheck\parsearg\nodezzz} |
|
| \def\nodezzz#1{\nodexxx [#1,]} |
|
| \def\nodexxx[#1,#2]{\gdef\lastnode{#1}} |
|
| \let\nwnode=\node |
|
| \let\lastnode=\relax |
|
| |
|
| \def\donoderef{\ifx\lastnode\relax\else |
|
| \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}\fi |
|
| \global\let\lastnode=\relax} |
|
| |
|
| \def\unnumbnoderef{\ifx\lastnode\relax\else |
|
| \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\unnumbsetref{\lastnode}\fi |
|
| \global\let\lastnode=\relax} |
|
| |
|
| \def\appendixnoderef{\ifx\lastnode\relax\else |
|
| \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\appendixsetref{\lastnode}\fi |
|
| \global\let\lastnode=\relax} |
|
| |
|
| % @refill is a no-op. |
|
| \let\refill=\relax |
|
| |
|
| % @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file. |
|
| % So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input. |
|
| % This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo. |
|
| \def\setfilename{% |
|
| \readauxfile |
|
| \opencontents |
|
| \openindices |
|
| \fixbackslash % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'. |
|
| \global\let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds. |
|
| \comment % Ignore the actual filename. |
|
| } |
|
| |
|
| % @bye. |
|
| \outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend} |
|
| |
|
| % \def\macro#1{\begingroup\ignoresections\catcode`\#=6\def\macrotemp{#1}\parsearg\macroxxx} |
|
| % \def\macroxxx#1#2 \end macro{% |
|
| % \expandafter\gdef\macrotemp#1{#2}% |
|
| % \endgroup} |
|
| |
|
| %\def\linemacro#1{\begingroup\ignoresections\catcode`\#=6\def\macrotemp{#1}\parsearg\linemacroxxx} |
|
| %\def\linemacroxxx#1#2 \end linemacro{% |
|
| %\let\parsearg=\relax |
|
| %\edef\macrotempx{\csname M\butfirst\expandafter\string\macrotemp\endcsname}% |
|
| %\expandafter\xdef\macrotemp{\parsearg\macrotempx}% |
|
| %\expandafter\gdef\macrotempx#1{#2}% |
|
| %\endgroup} |
|
| |
|
| %\def\butfirst#1{} |
|
| |
|
| |
|
| \message{fonts,} |
\message{fonts,} |
| |
|
| % Font-change commands. |
% Font-change commands. |
| |
|
| % Texinfo supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not. |
% Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not. |
| % So we set up a \sf analogous to plain's \rm, etc. |
% So we set up a \sf analogous to plain's \rm, etc. |
| \newfam\sffam |
\newfam\sffam |
| \def\sf{\fam=\sffam \tensf} |
\def\sf{\fam=\sffam \tensf} |
|
Line 1021 where each line of input produces a line
|
Line 1032 where each line of input produces a line
|
| % We don't need math for this one. |
% We don't need math for this one. |
| \def\ttsl{\tenttsl} |
\def\ttsl{\tenttsl} |
| |
|
| %% Try out Computer Modern fonts at \magstephalf |
% Use Computer Modern fonts at \magstephalf (11pt). |
| \let\mainmagstep=\magstephalf |
\newcount\mainmagstep |
| |
\mainmagstep=\magstephalf |
| |
|
| % Set the font macro #1 to the font named #2, adding on the |
% Set the font macro #1 to the font named #2, adding on the |
| % specified font prefix (normally `cm'). |
% specified font prefix (normally `cm'). |
|
Line 1077 where each line of input produces a line
|
Line 1089 where each line of input produces a line
|
| \setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1} |
\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1} |
| \def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \bf} |
\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \bf} |
| |
|
| % Fonts for indices and small examples (9pt). |
% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt). |
| % We actually use the slanted font rather than the italic, |
\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000} |
| % because texinfo normally uses the slanted fonts for that. |
\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000} |
| % Do not make many font distinctions in general in the index, since they |
\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900} |
| % aren't very useful. |
\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000} |
| \setfont\ninett\ttshape{9}{1000} |
\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000} |
| \setfont\indrm\rmshape{9}{1000} |
\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000} |
| \setfont\indit\slshape{9}{1000} |
\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900} |
| \let\indsl=\indit |
\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900} |
| \let\indtt=\ninett |
\font\smalli=cmmi9 |
| \let\indttsl=\ninett |
\font\smallsy=cmsy9 |
| \let\indsf=\indrm |
|
| \let\indbf=\indrm |
% Fonts for title page: |
| \setfont\indsc\scshape{10}{900} |
\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3} |
| \font\indi=cmmi9 |
\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4} |
| \font\indsy=cmsy9 |
\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4} |
| |
\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3} |
| |
\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4} |
| |
\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1} |
| |
\let\titlebf=\titlerm |
| |
\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4} |
| |
\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3 |
| |
\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4 |
| |
\def\authorrm{\secrm} |
| |
|
| % Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt). |
% Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt). |
| \setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2} |
\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2} |
|
Line 1100 where each line of input produces a line
|
Line 1120 where each line of input produces a line
|
| \setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3} |
\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3} |
| \setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2} |
\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2} |
| \setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3} |
\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3} |
| \setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep2} |
\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000} |
| \let\chapbf=\chaprm |
\let\chapbf=\chaprm |
| \setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3} |
\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3} |
| \font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2 |
\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2 |
|
Line 1137 where each line of input produces a line
|
Line 1157 where each line of input produces a line
|
| \setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315} |
\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315} |
| \setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315} |
\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315} |
| \setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf} |
\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf} |
| \setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1} |
\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315} |
| \setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf} |
\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf} |
| \let\ssecbf\ssecrm |
\let\ssecbf\ssecrm |
| \setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1} |
\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1} |
| \font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf |
\font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf |
| \font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep1 |
\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315 |
| % The smallcaps and symbol fonts should actually be scaled \magstep1.5, |
% The smallcaps and symbol fonts should actually be scaled \magstep1.5, |
| % but that is not a standard magnification. |
% but that is not a standard magnification. |
| |
|
| % Fonts for title page: |
|
| \setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3} |
|
| \let\authorrm = \secrm |
|
| |
|
| % In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters, |
% In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters, |
| % we have to define the \textfont of the standard families. Since |
% we have to define the \textfont of the standard families. Since |
| % texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts, we |
% texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts, we |
|
Line 1174 where each line of input produces a line
|
Line 1190 where each line of input produces a line
|
| \let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc |
\let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc |
| \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy \let\tenttsl=\textttsl |
\let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy \let\tenttsl=\textttsl |
| \resetmathfonts} |
\resetmathfonts} |
| |
\def\titlefonts{% |
| |
\let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl |
| |
\let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc |
| |
\let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy |
| |
\let\tenttsl=\titlettsl |
| |
\resetmathfonts \setleading{25pt}} |
| |
\def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rm #1}} |
| \def\chapfonts{% |
\def\chapfonts{% |
| \let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl |
\let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl |
| \let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc |
\let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc |
|
Line 1190 where each line of input produces a line
|
Line 1213 where each line of input produces a line
|
| \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl |
\let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl |
| \resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}} |
\resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}} |
| \let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts % Maybe make sssec fonts scaled magstephalf? |
\let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts % Maybe make sssec fonts scaled magstephalf? |
| \def\indexfonts{% |
\def\smallfonts{% |
| \let\tenrm=\indrm \let\tenit=\indit \let\tensl=\indsl |
\let\tenrm=\smallrm \let\tenit=\smallit \let\tensl=\smallsl |
| \let\tenbf=\indbf \let\tentt=\indtt \let\smallcaps=\indsc |
\let\tenbf=\smallbf \let\tentt=\smalltt \let\smallcaps=\smallsc |
| \let\tensf=\indsf \let\teni=\indi \let\tensy=\indsy \let\tenttsl=\indttsl |
\let\tensf=\smallsf \let\teni=\smalli \let\tensy=\smallsy |
| \resetmathfonts \setleading{12pt}} |
\let\tenttsl=\smallttsl |
| |
\resetmathfonts \setleading{11pt}} |
| |
|
| % Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes. |
% Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes. |
| % |
% |
| \textfonts |
\textfonts |
| |
|
| |
% Define these so they can be easily changed for other fonts. |
| |
\def\angleleft{$\langle$} |
| |
\def\angleright{$\rangle$} |
| |
|
| % Count depth in font-changes, for error checks |
% Count depth in font-changes, for error checks |
| \newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0 |
\newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0 |
| |
|
|
Line 1214 where each line of input produces a line
|
Line 1242 where each line of input produces a line
|
| % \smartitalic{ARG} outputs arg in italics, followed by an italic correction |
% \smartitalic{ARG} outputs arg in italics, followed by an italic correction |
| % unless the following character is such as not to need one. |
% unless the following character is such as not to need one. |
| \def\smartitalicx{\ifx\next,\else\ifx\next-\else\ifx\next.\else\/\fi\fi\fi} |
\def\smartitalicx{\ifx\next,\else\ifx\next-\else\ifx\next.\else\/\fi\fi\fi} |
| \def\smartitalic#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} |
\def\smartslanted#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} |
| |
\def\smartitalic#1{{\it #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} |
| |
|
| \let\i=\smartitalic |
\let\i=\smartitalic |
| \let\var=\smartitalic |
\let\var=\smartslanted |
| \let\dfn=\smartitalic |
\let\dfn=\smartslanted |
| \let\emph=\smartitalic |
\let\emph=\smartitalic |
| \let\cite=\smartitalic |
\let\cite=\smartslanted |
| |
|
| \def\b#1{{\bf #1}} |
\def\b#1{{\bf #1}} |
| \let\strong=\b |
\let\strong=\b |
|
Line 1237 where each line of input produces a line
|
Line 1266 where each line of input produces a line
|
| \null |
\null |
| } |
} |
| \let\ttfont=\t |
\let\ttfont=\t |
| \def\samp #1{`\tclose{#1}'\null} |
\def\samp#1{`\tclose{#1}'\null} |
| \setfont\smallrm\rmshape{8}{1000} |
\setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000} |
| \font\smallsy=cmsy9 |
\font\keysy=cmsy9 |
| \def\key#1{{\smallrm\textfont2=\smallsy \leavevmode\hbox{% |
\def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{% |
| \raise0.4pt\hbox{$\langle$}\kern-.08em\vtop{% |
\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{% |
| \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt |
\vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt |
| \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{$\langle$}}#1}}% |
\hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}% |
| \kern-0.4pt\hrule}% |
\kern-0.4pt\hrule}% |
| \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{$\rangle$}}}} |
\kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}} |
| % The old definition, with no lozenge: |
% The old definition, with no lozenge: |
| %\def\key #1{{\ttsl \nohyphenation \uppercase{#1}}\null} |
%\def\key #1{{\ttsl \nohyphenation \uppercase{#1}}\null} |
| \def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1} |
\def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1} |
| |
|
| |
% @file, @option are the same as @samp. |
| \let\file=\samp |
\let\file=\samp |
| \let\url=\samp % perhaps include a hypertex \special eventually |
\let\option=\samp |
| \def\email#1{$\langle${\tt #1}$\rangle$} |
|
| |
|
| % @code is a modification of @t, |
% @code is a modification of @t, |
| % which makes spaces the same size as normal in the surrounding text. |
% which makes spaces the same size as normal in the surrounding text. |
|
Line 1287 where each line of input produces a line
|
Line 1316 where each line of input produces a line
|
| % and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash. |
% and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash. |
| % -- rms. |
% -- rms. |
| { |
{ |
| \catcode`\-=\active |
\catcode`\-=\active |
| \catcode`\_=\active |
\catcode`\_=\active |
| \global\def\code{\begingroup \catcode`\-=\active \let-\codedash \catcode`\_=\active \let_\codeunder \codex} |
% |
| % The following is used by \doprintindex to insure that long function names |
\global\def\code{\begingroup |
| % wrap around. It is necessary for - and _ to be active before the index is |
\catcode`\-=\active \let-\codedash |
| % read from the file, as \entry parses the arguments long before \code is |
\catcode`\_=\active \let_\codeunder |
| % ever called. -- mycroft |
\codex |
| \global\def\indexbreaks{\catcode`\-=\active \let-\realdash \catcode`\_=\active \let_\realunder} |
} |
| |
% |
| |
% If we end up with any active - characters when handling the index, |
| |
% just treat them as a normal -. |
| |
\global\def\indexbreaks{\catcode`\-=\active \let-\realdash} |
| } |
} |
| |
|
| \def\realdash{-} |
\def\realdash{-} |
| \def\realunder{_} |
|
| \def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}} |
\def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}} |
| \def\codeunder{\normalunderscore\discretionary{}{}{}} |
\def\codeunder{\ifusingtt{\normalunderscore\discretionary{}{}{}}{\_}} |
| \def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup} |
\def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup} |
| |
|
| %\let\exp=\tclose %Was temporary |
%\let\exp=\tclose %Was temporary |
| |
|
| % @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command, |
% @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command, |
| % then @kbd has no effect. |
% then @kbd has no effect. |
| % |
|
| |
% @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always), |
| |
% `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends), |
| |
% or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always). |
| |
\def\kbdinputstyle{\parsearg\kbdinputstylexxx} |
| |
\def\kbdinputstylexxx#1{% |
| |
\def\arg{#1}% |
| |
\ifx\arg\worddistinct |
| |
\gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}% |
| |
\else\ifx\arg\wordexample |
| |
\gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}% |
| |
\else\ifx\arg\wordcode |
| |
\gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}% |
| |
\fi\fi\fi |
| |
} |
| |
\def\worddistinct{distinct} |
| |
\def\wordexample{example} |
| |
\def\wordcode{code} |
| |
|
| |
% Default is kbdinputdistinct. (Too much of a hassle to call the macro, |
| |
% the catcodes are wrong for parsearg to work.) |
| |
\gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl} |
| |
|
| \def\xkey{\key} |
\def\xkey{\key} |
| \def\kbdfoo#1#2#3\par{\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}% |
\def\kbdfoo#1#2#3\par{\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}% |
| \ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}% |
\ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}% |
| \else{\tclose{\ttsl\look}}\fi |
\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi |
| \else{\tclose{\ttsl\look}}\fi} |
\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi} |
| |
|
| |
% For @url, @env, @command quotes seem unnecessary, so use \code. |
| |
\let\url=\code |
| |
\let\env=\code |
| |
\let\command=\code |
| |
|
| |
% @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') takes an optional (comma-separated) |
| |
% second argument specifying the text to display and an optional third |
| |
% arg as text to display instead of (rather than in addition to) the url |
| |
% itself. First (mandatory) arg is the url. Perhaps eventually put in |
| |
% a hypertex \special here. |
| |
% |
| |
\def\uref#1{\douref #1,,,\finish} |
| |
\def\douref#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{\begingroup |
| |
\unsepspaces |
| |
\pdfurl{#1}% |
| |
\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% |
| |
\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt |
| |
\unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that |
| |
\else |
| |
\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% |
| |
\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt |
| |
\ifpdf |
| |
\unhbox0 % PDF: 2nd arg given, show only it |
| |
\else |
| |
\unhbox0\ (\code{#1})% DVI: 2nd arg given, show both it and url |
| |
\fi |
| |
\else |
| |
\code{#1}% only url given, so show it |
| |
\fi |
| |
\fi |
| |
\endlink |
| |
\endgroup} |
| |
|
| |
% rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97. |
| |
% So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf. |
| |
% |
| |
%\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright} |
| |
\ifpdf |
| |
\def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish} |
| |
\def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup |
| |
\unsepspaces |
| |
\pdfurl{mailto:#1}% |
| |
\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% |
| |
\ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi |
| |
\endlink |
| |
\endgroup} |
| |
\else |
| |
\let\email=\uref |
| |
\fi |
| |
|
| % Check if we are currently using a typewriter font. Since all the |
% Check if we are currently using a typewriter font. Since all the |
| % Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and |
% Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and |
| % shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have |
% shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have |
| % this property, we can check that font parameter. |
% this property, we can check that font parameter. |
| % |
% |
| \def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt } |
\def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt } |
| |
|
| % Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'. The only reason for the |
% Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'. The only reason for the |
| % argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of |
% argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt. |
| % @dmn{}pt. |
|
| % |
% |
| \def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1} |
\def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1} |
| |
|
|
Line 1334 where each line of input produces a line
|
Line 1437 where each line of input produces a line
|
| % Polish suppressed-l. --karl, 22sep96. |
% Polish suppressed-l. --karl, 22sep96. |
| %\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null} |
%\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null} |
| |
|
| |
% Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii. |
| \def\r#1{{\rm #1}} % roman font |
\def\r#1{{\rm #1}} % roman font |
| % Use of \lowercase was suggested. |
|
| \def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}} % smallcaps font |
\def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}} % smallcaps font |
| \def\ii#1{{\it #1}} % italic font |
\def\ii#1{{\it #1}} % italic font |
| |
|
| |
% @acronym downcases the argument and prints in smallcaps. |
| |
\def\acronym#1{{\smallcaps \lowercase{#1}}} |
| |
|
| % @pounds{} is a sterling sign. |
% @pounds{} is a sterling sign. |
| \def\pounds{{\it\$}} |
\def\pounds{{\it\$}} |
| |
|
|
Line 1349 where each line of input produces a line
|
Line 1455 where each line of input produces a line
|
| \newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc |
\newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc |
| |
|
| % First the title page. Must do @settitle before @titlepage. |
% First the title page. Must do @settitle before @titlepage. |
| \def\titlefont#1{{\titlerm #1}} |
|
| |
|
| \newif\ifseenauthor |
\newif\ifseenauthor |
| \newif\iffinishedtitlepage |
\newif\iffinishedtitlepage |
| |
|
| |
% Do an implicit @contents or @shortcontents after @end titlepage if the |
| |
% user says @setcontentsaftertitlepage or @setshortcontentsaftertitlepage. |
| |
% |
| |
\newif\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage |
| |
\let\setcontentsaftertitlepage = \setcontentsaftertitlepagetrue |
| |
\newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage |
| |
\let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue |
| |
|
| \def\shorttitlepage{\parsearg\shorttitlepagezzz} |
\def\shorttitlepage{\parsearg\shorttitlepagezzz} |
| \def\shorttitlepagezzz #1{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}% |
\def\shorttitlepagezzz #1{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}% |
| \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page} |
\endgroup\page\hbox{}\page} |
| |
|
| \def\titlepage{\begingroup \parindent=0pt \textfonts |
\def\titlepage{\begingroup \parindent=0pt \textfonts |
| \let\subtitlerm=\tenrm |
\let\subtitlerm=\tenrm |
| % I deinstalled the following change because \cmr12 is undefined. |
|
| % This change was not in the ChangeLog anyway. --rms. |
|
| % \let\subtitlerm=\cmr12 |
|
| \def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines}% |
\def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines}% |
| % |
% |
| \def\authorfont{\authorrm \normalbaselineskip = 16pt \normalbaselines}% |
\def\authorfont{\authorrm \normalbaselineskip = 16pt \normalbaselines}% |
|
Line 1372 where each line of input produces a line
|
Line 1481 where each line of input produces a line
|
| % |
% |
| % Now you can print the title using @title. |
% Now you can print the title using @title. |
| \def\title{\parsearg\titlezzz}% |
\def\title{\parsearg\titlezzz}% |
| \def\titlezzz##1{\leftline{\titlefont{##1}} |
\def\titlezzz##1{\leftline{\titlefonts\rm ##1} |
| % print a rule at the page bottom also. |
% print a rule at the page bottom also. |
| \finishedtitlepagefalse |
\finishedtitlepagefalse |
| \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt}% |
\vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt}% |
|
Line 1411 where each line of input produces a line
|
Line 1520 where each line of input produces a line
|
| % after the title page, which we certainly don't want. |
% after the title page, which we certainly don't want. |
| \oldpage |
\oldpage |
| \endgroup |
\endgroup |
| |
% |
| |
% If they want short, they certainly want long too. |
| |
\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage |
| |
\shortcontents |
| |
\contents |
| |
\global\let\shortcontents = \relax |
| |
\global\let\contents = \relax |
| |
\fi |
| |
% |
| |
\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage |
| |
\contents |
| |
\global\let\contents = \relax |
| |
\global\let\shortcontents = \relax |
| |
\fi |
| |
% |
| |
\ifpdf \pdfmakepagedesttrue \fi |
| |
% |
| \HEADINGSon |
\HEADINGSon |
| } |
} |
| |
|
|
Line 1424 where each line of input produces a line
|
Line 1550 where each line of input produces a line
|
| |
|
| \let\thispage=\folio |
\let\thispage=\folio |
| |
|
| \newtoks \evenheadline % Token sequence for heading line of even pages |
\newtoks\evenheadline % headline on even pages |
| \newtoks \oddheadline % Token sequence for heading line of odd pages |
\newtoks\oddheadline % headline on odd pages |
| \newtoks \evenfootline % Token sequence for footing line of even pages |
\newtoks\evenfootline % footline on even pages |
| \newtoks \oddfootline % Token sequence for footing line of odd pages |
\newtoks\oddfootline % footline on odd pages |
| |
|
| % Now make Tex use those variables |
% Now make Tex use those variables |
| \headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline |
\headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline |
|
Line 1461 where each line of input produces a line
|
Line 1587 where each line of input produces a line
|
| \gdef\oddheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{% |
\gdef\oddheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{% |
| \global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} |
\global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} |
| |
|
| \gdef\everyheadingxxx #1{\everyheadingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish} |
\gdef\everyheadingxxx#1{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}% |
| \gdef\everyheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{% |
|
| \global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}} |
|
| \global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} |
|
| |
|
| \gdef\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish} |
\gdef\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish} |
| \gdef\evenfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{% |
\gdef\evenfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{% |
|
Line 1472 where each line of input produces a line
|
Line 1595 where each line of input produces a line
|
| |
|
| \gdef\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish} |
\gdef\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish} |
| \gdef\oddfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{% |
\gdef\oddfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{% |
| \global\oddfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} |
\global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}% |
| |
% |
| |
% Leave some space for the footline. Hopefully ok to assume |
| |
% @evenfooting will not be used by itself. |
| |
\global\advance\pageheight by -\baselineskip |
| |
\global\advance\vsize by -\baselineskip |
| |
} |
| |
|
| \gdef\everyfootingxxx #1{\everyfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish} |
\gdef\everyfootingxxx#1{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}} |
| \gdef\everyfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{% |
|
| \global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}} |
|
| \global\oddfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} |
|
| % |
% |
| }% unbind the catcode of @. |
}% unbind the catcode of @. |
| |
|
|
Line 1545 where each line of input produces a line
|
Line 1671 where each line of input produces a line
|
| |
|
| % Subroutines used in generating headings |
% Subroutines used in generating headings |
| % Produces Day Month Year style of output. |
% Produces Day Month Year style of output. |
| \def\today{\number\day\space |
\def\today{% |
| \ifcase\month\or |
\number\day\space |
| January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or |
\ifcase\month |
| July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or December\fi |
\or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr |
| \space\number\year} |
\or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug |
| |
\or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec |
| % Use this if you want the Month Day, Year style of output. |
\fi |
| %\def\today{\ifcase\month\or |
\space\number\year} |
| %January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or |
|
| %July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or December\fi |
|
| %\space\number\day, \number\year} |
|
| |
|
| % @settitle line... specifies the title of the document, for headings |
|
| % It generates no output of its own |
|
| |
|
| \def\thistitle{No Title} |
% @settitle line... specifies the title of the document, for headings. |
| |
% It generates no output of its own. |
| |
\def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle} |
| \def\settitle{\parsearg\settitlezzz} |
\def\settitle{\parsearg\settitlezzz} |
| \def\settitlezzz #1{\gdef\thistitle{#1}} |
\def\settitlezzz #1{\gdef\thistitle{#1}} |
| |
|
| |
|
| \message{tables,} |
\message{tables,} |
| |
|
| % @tabs -- simple alignment |
|
| |
|
| % These don't work. For one thing, \+ is defined as outer. |
|
| % So these macros cannot even be defined. |
|
| |
|
| %\def\tabs{\parsearg\tabszzz} |
|
| %\def\tabszzz #1{\settabs\+#1\cr} |
|
| %\def\tabline{\parsearg\tablinezzz} |
|
| %\def\tablinezzz #1{\+#1\cr} |
|
| %\def\&{&} |
|
| |
|
| % Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x), @kitem(x), @xitem(x). |
% Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x), @kitem(x), @xitem(x). |
| |
|
| % default indentation of table text |
% default indentation of table text |
|
Line 1621 July\or August\or September\or October\o
|
Line 1731 July\or August\or September\or October\o
|
| \itemindex{#1}% |
\itemindex{#1}% |
| \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx. |
\nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx. |
| % |
% |
| % Be sure we are not still in the middle of a paragraph. |
|
| %{\parskip = 0in |
|
| %\par |
|
| %}% |
|
| % |
|
| % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line |
% If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line |
| % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that |
% by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that |
| % line. We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next |
% line. We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next |
|
Line 1654 July\or August\or September\or October\o
|
Line 1759 July\or August\or September\or October\o
|
| \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse |
\itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse |
| \else |
\else |
| % The item text fits into the space. Start a paragraph, so that the |
% The item text fits into the space. Start a paragraph, so that the |
| % following text (if any) will end up on the same line. Since that |
% following text (if any) will end up on the same line. |
| % text will be indented by \tableindent, we make the item text be in |
|
| % a zero-width box. |
|
| \noindent |
\noindent |
| \rlap{\hskip -\tableindent\box0}\ignorespaces% |
% Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in |
| \endgroup% |
% the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and |
| \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue% |
% eventually be printed. |
| |
\nobreak\kern-\tableindent |
| |
\dimen0 = \itemmax \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 |
| |
\unhbox0 |
| |
\nobreak\kern\dimen0 |
| |
\endgroup |
| |
\itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue |
| \fi |
\fi |
| } |
} |
| |
|
|
Line 1671 July\or August\or September\or October\o
|
Line 1780 July\or August\or September\or October\o
|
| \def\xitem{\errmessage{@xitem while not in a table}} |
\def\xitem{\errmessage{@xitem while not in a table}} |
| \def\xitemx{\errmessage{@xitemx while not in a table}} |
\def\xitemx{\errmessage{@xitemx while not in a table}} |
| |
|
| %% Contains a kludge to get @end[description] to work |
% Contains a kludge to get @end[description] to work. |
| \def\description{\tablez{\dontindex}{1}{}{}{}{}} |
\def\description{\tablez{\dontindex}{1}{}{}{}{}} |
| |
|
| |
% @table, @ftable, @vtable. |
| \def\table{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\tablex} |
\def\table{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\tablex} |
| {\obeylines\obeyspaces% |
{\obeylines\obeyspaces% |
| \gdef\tablex #1^^M{% |
\gdef\tablex #1^^M{% |
|
Line 1733 July\or August\or September\or October\o
|
Line 1843 July\or August\or September\or October\o
|
| \def\itemize{\parsearg\itemizezzz} |
\def\itemize{\parsearg\itemizezzz} |
| |
|
| \def\itemizezzz #1{% |
\def\itemizezzz #1{% |
| \begingroup % ended by the @end itemsize |
\begingroup % ended by the @end itemize |
| \itemizey {#1}{\Eitemize} |
\itemizey {#1}{\Eitemize} |
| } |
} |
| |
|
|
Line 1861 July\or August\or September\or October\o
|
Line 1971 July\or August\or September\or October\o
|
| \def\itemizeitem{% |
\def\itemizeitem{% |
| \advance\itemno by 1 |
\advance\itemno by 1 |
| {\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% |
{\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% |
| \ifhmode \errmessage{\in hmode at itemizeitem}\fi |
\ifhmode \errmessage{In hmode at itemizeitem}\fi |
| {\parskip=0in \hskip 0pt |
{\parskip=0in \hskip 0pt |
| \hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents\hskip \itemmargin}% |
\hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents\hskip \itemmargin}% |
| \vadjust{\penalty 1200}}% |
\vadjust{\penalty 1200}}% |
|
Line 1879 July\or August\or September\or October\o
|
Line 1989 July\or August\or September\or October\o
|
| |
|
| % To make preamble: |
% To make preamble: |
| % |
% |
| % Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize: |
% Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize: |
| % @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45 |
% @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45 |
| % @item ... |
% @item ... |
| % |
% |
|
Line 1888 July\or August\or September\or October\o
|
Line 1998 July\or August\or September\or October\o
|
| % columns as desired. |
% columns as desired. |
| |
|
| |
|
| % Or use a template: |
% Or use a template: |
| % @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} |
% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} |
| % @item ... |
% @item ... |
| % using the widest term desired in each column. |
% using the widest term desired in each column. |
| |
% |
| |
% For those who want to use more than one line's worth of words in |
| |
% the preamble, break the line within one argument and it |
| |
% will parse correctly, i.e., |
| |
% |
| |
% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 |
| |
% template} |
| |
% Not: |
| |
% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} |
| |
% {Column 3 template} |
| |
|
| |
% Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column |
| |
% starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's |
| |
% with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed, |
| |
% ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns. |
| |
|
| |
% @item, @tab, @multitable or @end multitable do not need to be on their |
| |
% own lines, but it will not hurt if they are. |
| |
|
| |
% Sample multitable: |
| |
|
| |
% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} |
| |
% @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col |
| |
% @item |
| |
% first col stuff |
| |
% @tab |
| |
% second col stuff |
| |
% @tab |
| |
% third col |
| |
% @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff |
| |
% @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column. |
| |
% |
| |
% They will wrap at the width determined by the template. |
| |
% @item@tab@tab This will be in third column. |
| |
% @end multitable |
| |
|
| |
% Default dimensions may be reset by user. |
| |
% @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table. |
| |
% @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table. |
| |
% @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns. |
| |
% @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline |
| |
% to baseline. |
| |
% 0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing. |
| |
% |
| |
\newskip\multitableparskip |
| |
\newskip\multitableparindent |
| |
\newdimen\multitablecolspace |
| |
\newskip\multitablelinespace |
| |
\multitableparskip=0pt |
| |
\multitableparindent=6pt |
| |
\multitablecolspace=12pt |
| |
\multitablelinespace=0pt |
| |
|
| |
% Macros used to set up halign preamble: |
| |
% |
| |
\let\endsetuptable\relax |
| |
\def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable} |
| |
\let\columnfractions\relax |
| |
\def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions} |
| |
\newif\ifsetpercent |
| |
|
| |
% #1 is the part of the @columnfraction before the decimal point, which |
| |
% is presumably either 0 or the empty string (but we don't check, we |
| |
% just throw it away). #2 is the decimal part, which we use as the |
| |
% percent of \hsize for this column. |
| |
\def\pickupwholefraction#1.#2 {% |
| |
\global\advance\colcount by 1 |
| |
\expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{.#2\hsize}% |
| |
\setuptable |
| |
} |
| |
|
| |
\newcount\colcount |
| |
\def\setuptable#1{% |
| |
\def\firstarg{#1}% |
| |
\ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable |
| |
\let\go = \relax |
| |
\else |
| |
\ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions |
| |
\global\setpercenttrue |
| |
\else |
| |
\ifsetpercent |
| |
\let\go\pickupwholefraction |
| |
\else |
| |
\global\advance\colcount by 1 |
| |
\setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip }% Add a normal word space as a separator; |
| |
% typically that is always in the input, anyway. |
| |
\expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}% |
| |
\fi |
| |
\fi |
| |
\ifx\go\pickupwholefraction |
| |
% Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so |
| |
% we'll always have a period there to be parsed. |
| |
\def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}% |
| |
\else |
| |
\let\go = \setuptable |
| |
\fi% |
| |
\fi |
| |
\go |
| |
} |
| |
|
| |
% This used to have \hskip1sp. But then the space in a template line is |
| |
% not enough. That is bad. So let's go back to just & until we |
| |
% encounter the problem it was intended to solve again. |
| |
% --karl, nathan@acm.org, 20apr99. |
| |
\def\tab{&} |
| |
|
| |
% @multitable ... @end multitable definitions: |
| |
% |
| |
\def\multitable{\parsearg\dotable} |
| |
\def\dotable#1{\bgroup |
| |
\vskip\parskip |
| |
\let\item\crcr |
| |
\tolerance=9500 |
| |
\hbadness=9500 |
| |
\setmultitablespacing |
| |
\parskip=\multitableparskip |
| |
\parindent=\multitableparindent |
| |
\overfullrule=0pt |
| |
\global\colcount=0 |
| |
\def\Emultitable{\global\setpercentfalse\cr\egroup\egroup}% |
| |
% |
| |
% To parse everything between @multitable and @item: |
| |
\setuptable#1 \endsetuptable |
| |
% |
| |
% \everycr will reset column counter, \colcount, at the end of |
| |
% each line. Every column entry will cause \colcount to advance by one. |
| |
% The table preamble |
| |
% looks at the current \colcount to find the correct column width. |
| |
\everycr{\noalign{% |
| |
% |
| |
% \filbreak%% keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages. |
| |
% Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the table |
| |
% breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better? Wait until the problem |
| |
% manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl. |
| |
\global\colcount=0\relax}}% |
| |
% |
| |
% This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will |
| |
% be used as many times as user calls for columns. |
| |
% \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and |
| |
% continue for many paragraphs if desired. |
| |
\halign\bgroup&\global\advance\colcount by 1\relax |
| |
\multistrut\vtop{\hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname |
| |
% |
| |
% In order to keep entries from bumping into each other |
| |
% we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after |
| |
% the first one. |
| |
% |
| |
% If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace |
| |
% to the width of each template entry. |
| |
% |
| |
% If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will |
| |
% use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip |
| |
% will keep entries from bumping into each other. Table will start at |
| |
% left margin and final column will justify at right margin. |
| |
% |
| |
% Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment. |
| |
\rightskip=0pt |
| |
\ifnum\colcount=1 |
| |
% The first column will be indented with the surrounding text. |
| |
\advance\hsize by\leftskip |
| |
\else |
| |
\ifsetpercent \else |
| |
% If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize |
| |
% we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace. |
| |
\advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace |
| |
\fi |
| |
% In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace: |
| |
\leftskip=\multitablecolspace |
| |
\fi |
| |
% Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious |
| |
% blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the |
| |
% box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself. |
| |
% For example: |
| |
% @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89 |
| |
% @item @code{#} |
| |
% @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country. |
| |
% Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively marking |
| |
% characters. |
| |
\noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut}\cr |
| |
} |
| |
|
| |
\def\setmultitablespacing{% test to see if user has set \multitablelinespace. |
| |
% If so, do nothing. If not, give it an appropriate dimension based on |
| |
% current baselineskip. |
| |
\ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt |
| |
\setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip |
| |
\global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0 |
| |
%% strut to put in table in case some entry doesn't have descenders, |
| |
%% to keep lines equally spaced |
| |
\let\multistrut = \strut |
| |
\else |
| |
%% FIXME: what is \box0 supposed to be? |
| |
\gdef\multistrut{\vrule height\multitablelinespace depth\dp0 |
| |
width0pt\relax} \fi |
| |
%% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of |
| |
%% table. If not, do nothing. |
| |
%% If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace. |
| |
\ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace |
| |
\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace |
| |
\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller |
| |
%% than skip between lines in the table. |
| |
\fi% |
| |
\ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt |
| |
\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace |
| |
\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller |
| |
%% than skip between lines in the table. |
| |
\fi} |
| |
|
| |
|
| |
\message{conditionals,} |
| |
% Prevent errors for section commands. |
| |
% Used in @ignore and in failing conditionals. |
| |
\def\ignoresections{% |
| |
\let\chapter=\relax |
| |
\let\unnumbered=\relax |
| |
\let\top=\relax |
| |
\let\unnumberedsec=\relax |
| |
\let\unnumberedsection=\relax |
| |
\let\unnumberedsubsec=\relax |
| |
\let\unnumberedsubsection=\relax |
| |
\let\unnumberedsubsubsec=\relax |
| |
\let\unnumberedsubsubsection=\relax |
| |
\let\section=\relax |
| |
\let\subsec=\relax |
| |
\let\subsubsec=\relax |
| |
\let\subsection=\relax |
| |
\let\subsubsection=\relax |
| |
\let\appendix=\relax |
| |
\let\appendixsec=\relax |
| |
\let\appendixsection=\relax |
| |
\let\appendixsubsec=\relax |
| |
\let\appendixsubsection=\relax |
| |
\let\appendixsubsubsec=\relax |
| |
\let\appendixsubsubsection=\relax |
| |
\let\contents=\relax |
| |
\let\smallbook=\relax |
| |
\let\titlepage=\relax |
| |
} |
| |
|
| |
% Used in nested conditionals, where we have to parse the Texinfo source |
| |
% and so want to turn off most commands, in case they are used |
| |
% incorrectly. |
| |
% |
| |
\def\ignoremorecommands{% |
| |
\let\defcodeindex = \relax |
| |
\let\defcv = \relax |
| |
\let\deffn = \relax |
| |
\let\deffnx = \relax |
| |
\let\defindex = \relax |
| |
\let\defivar = \relax |
| |
\let\defmac = \relax |
| |
\let\defmethod = \relax |
| |
\let\defop = \relax |
| |
\let\defopt = \relax |
| |
\let\defspec = \relax |
| |
\let\deftp = \relax |
| |
\let\deftypefn = \relax |
| |
\let\deftypefun = \relax |
| |
\let\deftypeivar = \relax |
| |
\let\deftypeop = \relax |
| |
\let\deftypevar = \relax |
| |
\let\deftypevr = \relax |
| |
\let\defun = \relax |
| |
\let\defvar = \relax |
| |
\let\defvr = \relax |
| |
\let\ref = \relax |
| |
\let\xref = \relax |
| |
\let\printindex = \relax |
| |
\let\pxref = \relax |
| |
\let\settitle = \relax |
| |
\let\setchapternewpage = \relax |
| |
\let\setchapterstyle = \relax |
| |
\let\everyheading = \relax |
| |
\let\evenheading = \relax |
| |
\let\oddheading = \relax |
| |
\let\everyfooting = \relax |
| |
\let\evenfooting = \relax |
| |
\let\oddfooting = \relax |
| |
\let\headings = \relax |
| |
\let\include = \relax |
| |
\let\lowersections = \relax |
| |
\let\down = \relax |
| |
\let\raisesections = \relax |
| |
\let\up = \relax |
| |
\let\set = \relax |
| |
\let\clear = \relax |
| |
\let\item = \relax |
| |
} |
| |
|
| |
% Ignore @ignore ... @end ignore. |
| |
% |
| |
\def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}} |
| |
|
| |
% Ignore @ifinfo, @ifhtml, @ifnottex, @html, @menu, and @direntry text. |
| |
% |
| |
\def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}} |
| |
\def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}} |
| |
\def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}} |
| |
\def\html{\doignore{html}} |
| |
\def\menu{\doignore{menu}} |
| |
\def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}} |
| |
|
| |
% @dircategory CATEGORY -- specify a category of the dir file |
| |
% which this file should belong to. Ignore this in TeX. |
| |
\let\dircategory = \comment |
| |
|
| |
% Ignore text until a line `@end #1'. |
| |
% |
| |
\def\doignore#1{\begingroup |
| |
% Don't complain about control sequences we have declared \outer. |
| |
\ignoresections |
| |
% |
| |
% Define a command to swallow text until we reach `@end #1'. |
| |
% This @ is a catcode 12 token (that is the normal catcode of @ in |
| |
% this texinfo.tex file). We change the catcode of @ below to match. |
| |
\long\def\doignoretext##1@end #1{\enddoignore}% |
| |
% |
| |
% Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants. |
| |
\catcode32 = 10 |
| |
% |
| |
% Ignore braces, too, so mismatched braces don't cause trouble. |
| |
\catcode`\{ = 9 |
| |
\catcode`\} = 9 |
| |
% |
| |
% We must not have @c interpreted as a control sequence. |
| |
\catcode`\@ = 12 |
| |
% |
| |
% Make the letter c a comment character so that the rest of the line |
| |
% will be ignored. This way, the document can have (for example) |
| |
% @c @end ifinfo |
| |
% and the @end ifinfo will be properly ignored. |
| |
% (We've just changed @ to catcode 12.) |
| |
\catcode`\c = 14 |
| |
% |
| |
% And now expand that command. |
| |
\doignoretext |
| |
} |
| |
|
| |
% What we do to finish off ignored text. |
| |
% |
| |
\def\enddoignore{\endgroup\ignorespaces}% |
| |
|
| |
\newif\ifwarnedobs\warnedobsfalse |
| |
\def\obstexwarn{% |
| |
\ifwarnedobs\relax\else |
| |
% We need to warn folks that they may have trouble with TeX 3.0. |
| |
% This uses \immediate\write16 rather than \message to get newlines. |
| |
\immediate\write16{} |
| |
\immediate\write16{WARNING: for users of Unix TeX 3.0!} |
| |
\immediate\write16{This manual trips a bug in TeX version 3.0 (tex hangs).} |
| |
\immediate\write16{If you are running another version of TeX, relax.} |
| |
\immediate\write16{If you are running Unix TeX 3.0, kill this TeX process.} |
| |
\immediate\write16{ Then upgrade your TeX installation if you can.} |
| |
\immediate\write16{ (See ftp://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/TeX.README.)} |
| |
\immediate\write16{If you are stuck with version 3.0, run the} |
| |
\immediate\write16{ script ``tex3patch'' from the Texinfo distribution} |
| |
\immediate\write16{ to use a workaround.} |
| |
\immediate\write16{} |
| |
\global\warnedobstrue |
| |
\fi |
| |
} |
| |
|
| |
% **In TeX 3.0, setting text in \nullfont hangs tex. For a |
| |
% workaround (which requires the file ``dummy.tfm'' to be installed), |
| |
% uncomment the following line: |
| |
%%%%%\font\nullfont=dummy\let\obstexwarn=\relax |
| |
|
| |
% Ignore text, except that we keep track of conditional commands for |
| |
% purposes of nesting, up to an `@end #1' command. |
| |
% |
| |
\def\nestedignore#1{% |
| |
\obstexwarn |
| |
% We must actually expand the ignored text to look for the @end |
| |
% command, so that nested ignore constructs work. Thus, we put the |
| |
% text into a \vbox and then do nothing with the result. To minimize |
| |
% the change of memory overflow, we follow the approach outlined on |
| |
% page 401 of the TeXbook: make the current font be a dummy font. |
| |
% |
| |
\setbox0 = \vbox\bgroup |
| |
% Don't complain about control sequences we have declared \outer. |
| |
\ignoresections |
| |
% |
| |
% Define `@end #1' to end the box, which will in turn undefine the |
| |
% @end command again. |
| |
\expandafter\def\csname E#1\endcsname{\egroup\ignorespaces}% |
| |
% |
| |
% We are going to be parsing Texinfo commands. Most cause no |
| |
% trouble when they are used incorrectly, but some commands do |
| |
% complicated argument parsing or otherwise get confused, so we |
| |
% undefine them. |
| |
% |
| |
% We can't do anything about stray @-signs, unfortunately; |
| |
% they'll produce `undefined control sequence' errors. |
| |
\ignoremorecommands |
| |
% |
| |
% Set the current font to be \nullfont, a TeX primitive, and define |
| |
% all the font commands to also use \nullfont. We don't use |
| |
% dummy.tfm, as suggested in the TeXbook, because not all sites |
| |
% might have that installed. Therefore, math mode will still |
| |
% produce output, but that should be an extremely small amount of |
| |
% stuff compared to the main input. |
| |
% |
| |
\nullfont |
| |
\let\tenrm=\nullfont \let\tenit=\nullfont \let\tensl=\nullfont |
| |
\let\tenbf=\nullfont \let\tentt=\nullfont \let\smallcaps=\nullfont |
| |
\let\tensf=\nullfont |
| |
% Similarly for index fonts (mostly for their use in smallexample). |
| |
\let\smallrm=\nullfont \let\smallit=\nullfont \let\smallsl=\nullfont |
| |
\let\smallbf=\nullfont \let\smalltt=\nullfont \let\smallsc=\nullfont |
| |
\let\smallsf=\nullfont |
| |
% |
| |
% Don't complain when characters are missing from the fonts. |
| |
\tracinglostchars = 0 |
| |
% |
| |
% Don't bother to do space factor calculations. |
| |
\frenchspacing |
| |
% |
| |
% Don't report underfull hboxes. |
| |
\hbadness = 10000 |
| |
% |
| |
% Do minimal line-breaking. |
| |
\pretolerance = 10000 |
| |
% |
| |
% Do not execute instructions in @tex |
| |
\def\tex{\doignore{tex}}% |
| |
% Do not execute macro definitions. |
| |
% `c' is a comment character, so the word `macro' will get cut off. |
| |
\def\macro{\doignore{ma}}% |
| |
} |
| |
|
| |
% @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value. |
| |
% @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE. |
| % |
% |
| % For those who want to use more than one line's worth of words in |
% Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be |
| % the preamble, break the line within one argument and it |
% empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our |
| % will parse correctly, i.e., |
% own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we |
| |
% didn't need it. Make sure the catcode of space is correct to avoid |
| |
% losing inside @example, for instance. |
| % |
% |
| % @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 |
\def\set{\begingroup\catcode` =10 |
| % template} |
\catcode`\-=12 \catcode`\_=12 % Allow - and _ in VAR. |
| % Not: |
\parsearg\setxxx} |
| % @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} |
\def\setxxx#1{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy} |
| % {Column 3 template} |
\def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{% |
| |
\def\temp{#2}% |
| % Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column |
\ifx\temp\empty \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname = \empty |
| % starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's |
\else \setzzz{#1}#2\endsetzzz % Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted. |
| % with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed, |
\fi |
| % ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns. |
\endgroup |
| |
} |
| % @item, @tab, @multitable or @end multitable do not need to be on their |
% Can't use \xdef to pre-expand #2 and save some time, since \temp or |
| % own lines, but it will not hurt if they are. |
% \next or other control sequences that we've defined might get us into |
| |
% an infinite loop. Consider `@set foo @cite{bar}'. |
| % Sample multitable: |
\def\setzzz#1#2 \endsetzzz{\expandafter\gdef\csname SET#1\endcsname{#2}} |
| |
|
| % @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} |
|
| % @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col |
|
| % @item |
|
| % first col stuff |
|
| % @tab |
|
| % second col stuff |
|
| % @tab |
|
| % third col |
|
| % @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff |
|
| % @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column. |
|
| % |
|
| % They will wrap at the width determined by the template. |
|
| % @item@tab@tab This will be in third column. |
|
| % @end multitable |
|
| |
|
| % Default dimensions may be reset by user. |
|
| % @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table. |
|
| % @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table. |
|
| % @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns. |
|
| % @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline |
|
| % to baseline. |
|
| % 0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing. |
|
| |
|
| %%%% |
|
| % Dimensions |
|
| |
|
| \newskip\multitableparskip |
|
| \newskip\multitableparindent |
|
| \newdimen\multitablecolspace |
|
| \newskip\multitablelinespace |
|
| \multitableparskip=0pt |
|
| \multitableparindent=6pt |
|
| \multitablecolspace=12pt |
|
| \multitablelinespace=0pt |
|
| |
|
| %%%% |
|
| % Macros used to set up halign preamble: |
|
| \let\endsetuptable\relax |
|
| \def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable} |
|
| \let\columnfractions\relax |
|
| \def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions} |
|
| \newif\ifsetpercent |
|
| |
|
| %% 2/1/96, to allow fractions to be given with more than one digit. |
% @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR. |
| \def\pickupwholefraction#1 {\global\advance\colcount by1 % |
% |
| \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{.#1\hsize}% |
\def\clear{\parsearg\clearxxx} |
| \setuptable} |
\def\clearxxx#1{\global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax} |
| |
|
| \newcount\colcount |
% @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo. |
| \def\setuptable#1{\def\firstarg{#1}% |
{ |
| \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable\let\go\relax% |
\catcode`\_ = \active |
| \else |
% |
| \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions\global\setpercenttrue% |
% We might end up with active _ or - characters in the argument if |
| |
% we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}. So \let any |
| |
% such active characters to their normal equivalents. |
| |
\gdef\value{\begingroup |
| |
\catcode`\-=12 \catcode`\_=12 |
| |
\indexbreaks \let_\normalunderscore |
| |
\valuexxx} |
| |
} |
| |
\def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup} |
| |
|
| |
% We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's |
| |
% properly in indexes (we \let\value to this in \indexdummies). Ones |
| |
% whose names contain - or _ still won't work, but we can't do anything |
| |
% about that. The command has to be fully expandable, since the result |
| |
% winds up in the index file. This means that if the variable's value |
| |
% contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain it will fail |
| |
% (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work to do a |
| |
% one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete). |
| |
% |
| |
\def\expandablevalue#1{% |
| |
\expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax |
| |
{[No value for ``#1'']}% |
| \else |
\else |
| \ifsetpercent |
\csname SET#1\endcsname |
| \let\go\pickupwholefraction % In this case arg of setuptable |
\fi |
| % is the decimal point before the |
} |
| % number given in percent of hsize. |
|
| % We don't need this so we don't use it. |
|
| \else |
|
| \global\advance\colcount by1 |
|
| \setbox0=\hbox{#1 }% Add a normal word space as a separator; |
|
| % typically that is always in the input, anyway. |
|
| \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}% |
|
| \fi% |
|
| \fi% |
|
| \ifx\go\pickupwholefraction\else\let\go\setuptable\fi% |
|
| \fi\go} |
|
| |
|
| %%%% |
|
| % multitable syntax |
|
| \def\tab{&\hskip1sp\relax} % 2/2/96 |
|
| % tiny skip here makes sure this column space is |
|
| % maintained, even if it is never used. |
|
| |
|
| |
|
| %%%% |
|
| % @multitable ... @end multitable definitions: |
|
| |
|
| \def\multitable{\parsearg\dotable} |
% @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined |
| |
% with @set. |
| |
% |
| |
\def\ifset{\parsearg\ifsetxxx} |
| |
\def\ifsetxxx #1{% |
| |
\expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax |
| |
\expandafter\ifsetfail |
| |
\else |
| |
\expandafter\ifsetsucceed |
| |
\fi |
| |
} |
| |
\def\ifsetsucceed{\conditionalsucceed{ifset}} |
| |
\def\ifsetfail{\nestedignore{ifset}} |
| |
\defineunmatchedend{ifset} |
| |
|
| \def\dotable#1{\bgroup |
% @ifclear VAR ... @end ifclear reads the `...' iff VAR has never been |
| \let\item\cr |
% defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear. |
| \tolerance=9500 |
% |
| \hbadness=9500 |
\def\ifclear{\parsearg\ifclearxxx} |
| \setmultitablespacing |
\def\ifclearxxx #1{% |
| \parskip=\multitableparskip |
\expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax |
| \parindent=\multitableparindent |
\expandafter\ifclearsucceed |
| \overfullrule=0pt |
|
| \global\colcount=0\relax% |
|
| \def\Emultitable{\global\setpercentfalse\global\everycr{}\cr\egroup\egroup}% |
|
| % To parse everything between @multitable and @item : |
|
| \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable |
|
| % Need to reset this to 0 after \setuptable. |
|
| \global\colcount=0\relax% |
|
| % |
|
| % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will |
|
| % be used as many times as user calls for columns. |
|
| % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and |
|
| % continue for many paragraphs if desired. |
|
| \halign\bgroup&\global\advance\colcount by 1\relax% |
|
| \multistrut\vtop{\hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname |
|
| % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other |
|
| % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after |
|
| % the first one. |
|
| % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace |
|
| % to the width of each template entry. |
|
| % If user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize |
|
| % we will use that dimension as the width of the column, and |
|
| % the \leftskip will keep entries from bumping into each other. |
|
| % Table will start at left margin and final column will justify at |
|
| % right margin. |
|
| \ifnum\colcount=1 |
|
| \else |
|
| \ifsetpercent |
|
| \else |
\else |
| % If user has <not> set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize |
\expandafter\ifclearfail |
| % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace |
|
| \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace |
|
| \fi |
\fi |
| % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace: |
|
| \leftskip=\multitablecolspace |
|
| \fi |
|
| \noindent##\multistrut}\cr% |
|
| % \everycr will reset column counter, \colcount, at the end of |
|
| % each line. Every column entry will cause \colcount to advance by one. |
|
| % The table preamble |
|
| % looks at the current \colcount to find the correct column width. |
|
| \global\everycr{\noalign{% |
|
| \filbreak%% keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages. |
|
| \global\colcount=0\relax}} |
|
| } |
} |
| |
\def\ifclearsucceed{\conditionalsucceed{ifclear}} |
| |
\def\ifclearfail{\nestedignore{ifclear}} |
| |
\defineunmatchedend{ifclear} |
| |
|
| \def\setmultitablespacing{% test to see if user has set \multitablelinespace. |
% @iftex, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo always succeed; we read the text |
| % If so, do nothing. If not, give it an appropriate dimension based on |
% following, through the first @end iftex (etc.). Make `@end iftex' |
| % current baselineskip. |
% (etc.) valid only after an @iftex. |
| \ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt |
% |
| %% strut to put in table in case some entry doesn't have descenders, |
\def\iftex{\conditionalsucceed{iftex}} |
| %% to keep lines equally spaced |
\def\ifnothtml{\conditionalsucceed{ifnothtml}} |
| \let\multistrut = \strut |
\def\ifnotinfo{\conditionalsucceed{ifnotinfo}} |
| %% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of |
\defineunmatchedend{iftex} |
| %% table. If not, do nothing. |
\defineunmatchedend{ifnothtml} |
| %% If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace. |
\defineunmatchedend{ifnotinfo} |
| \else |
|
| \gdef\multistrut{\vrule height\multitablelinespace depth\dp0 |
% We can't just want to start a group at @iftex (for example) and end it |
| width0pt\relax} \fi |
% at @end iftex, since then @set commands inside the conditional have no |
| \ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace |
% effect (they'd get reverted at the end of the group). So we must |
| \global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace |
% define \Eiftex to redefine itself to be its previous value. (We can't |
| \global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller |
% just define it to fail again with an ``unmatched end'' error, since |
| %% than skip between lines in the table. |
% the @ifset might be nested.) |
| \fi% |
% |
| \ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt |
\def\conditionalsucceed#1{% |
| \global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace |
\edef\temp{% |
| \global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller |
% Remember the current value of \E#1. |
| %% than skip between lines in the table. |
\let\nece{prevE#1} = \nece{E#1}% |
| \fi} |
% |
| |
% At the `@end #1', redefine \E#1 to be its previous value. |
| |
\def\nece{E#1}{\let\nece{E#1} = \nece{prevE#1}}% |
| |
}% |
| |
\temp |
| |
} |
| |
|
| |
% We need to expand lots of \csname's, but we don't want to expand the |
| |
% control sequences after we've constructed them. |
| |
% |
| |
\def\nece#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname} |
| |
|
| |
% @defininfoenclose. |
| |
\let\definfoenclose=\comment |
| |
|
| |
|
| \message{indexing,} |
\message{indexing,} |
|
Line 2086 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 2576 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| % the file that accumulates this index. The file's extension is foo. |
% the file that accumulates this index. The file's extension is foo. |
| % The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long |
% The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long |
| % for the sake of vms. |
% for the sake of vms. |
| |
% |
| \def\newindex #1{ |
\def\newindex#1{% |
| \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname% Define number for output file |
\iflinks |
| \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file |
\expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname |
| \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define \xxxindex |
\openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file |
| \noexpand\doindex {#1}} |
\fi |
| |
\expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define @#1index |
| |
\noexpand\doindex{#1}} |
| } |
} |
| |
|
| % @defindex foo == \newindex{foo} |
% @defindex foo == \newindex{foo} |
|
Line 2100 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 2592 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| |
|
| % Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code. |
% Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code. |
| |
|
| \def\newcodeindex #1{ |
\def\newcodeindex#1{% |
| \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname% Define number for output file |
\iflinks |
| \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file |
\expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname |
| \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define \xxxindex |
\openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 |
| \noexpand\docodeindex {#1}} |
\fi |
| |
\expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% |
| |
\noexpand\docodeindex{#1}} |
| } |
} |
| |
|
| \def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex} |
\def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex} |
| |
|
| % @synindex foo bar makes index foo feed into index bar. |
% @synindex foo bar makes index foo feed into index bar. |
| % Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index. |
% Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index. |
| \def\synindex #1 #2 {% |
% The \closeout helps reduce unnecessary open files; the limit on the |
| \expandafter\let\expandafter\synindexfoo\expandafter=\csname#2indfile\endcsname |
% Acorn RISC OS is a mere 16 files. |
| \expandafter\let\csname#1indfile\endcsname=\synindexfoo |
\def\synindex#1 #2 {% |
| \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define \xxxindex |
\expandafter\let\expandafter\synindexfoo\expandafter=\csname#2indfile\endcsname |
| \noexpand\doindex {#2}}% |
\expandafter\closeout\csname#1indfile\endcsname |
| |
\expandafter\let\csname#1indfile\endcsname=\synindexfoo |
| |
\expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% define \xxxindex |
| |
\noexpand\doindex{#2}}% |
| } |
} |
| |
|
| % @syncodeindex foo bar similar, but put all entries made for index foo |
% @syncodeindex foo bar similar, but put all entries made for index foo |
| % inside @code. |
% inside @code. |
| \def\syncodeindex #1 #2 {% |
\def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {% |
| \expandafter\let\expandafter\synindexfoo\expandafter=\csname#2indfile\endcsname |
\expandafter\let\expandafter\synindexfoo\expandafter=\csname#2indfile\endcsname |
| \expandafter\let\csname#1indfile\endcsname=\synindexfoo |
\expandafter\closeout\csname#1indfile\endcsname |
| \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define \xxxindex |
\expandafter\let\csname#1indfile\endcsname=\synindexfoo |
| \noexpand\docodeindex {#2}}% |
\expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% define \xxxindex |
| |
\noexpand\docodeindex{#2}}% |
| } |
} |
| |
|
| % Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros. |
% Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros. |
|
Line 2145 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 2643 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| \def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}} |
\def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}} |
| |
|
| \def\indexdummies{% |
\def\indexdummies{% |
| |
\def\ { }% |
| % Take care of the plain tex accent commands. |
% Take care of the plain tex accent commands. |
| \def\"{\realbackslash "}% |
\def\"{\realbackslash "}% |
| \def\`{\realbackslash `}% |
\def\`{\realbackslash `}% |
|
Line 2174 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 2673 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| % (Must be a way to avoid doing expansion at all, and thus not have to |
% (Must be a way to avoid doing expansion at all, and thus not have to |
| % laboriously list every single command here.) |
% laboriously list every single command here.) |
| \def\@{@}% will be @@ when we switch to @ as escape char. |
\def\@{@}% will be @@ when we switch to @ as escape char. |
| %\let\{ = \lbracecmd |
% Need these in case \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again. |
| %\let\} = \rbracecmd |
% But can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes |
| |
% braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters. |
| |
\let\{ = \mylbrace |
| |
\let\} = \myrbrace |
| \def\_{{\realbackslash _}}% |
\def\_{{\realbackslash _}}% |
| \def\w{\realbackslash w }% |
\def\w{\realbackslash w }% |
| \def\bf{\realbackslash bf }% |
\def\bf{\realbackslash bf }% |
|
Line 2186 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 2688 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| \def\gtr{\realbackslash gtr}% |
\def\gtr{\realbackslash gtr}% |
| \def\less{\realbackslash less}% |
\def\less{\realbackslash less}% |
| \def\hat{\realbackslash hat}% |
\def\hat{\realbackslash hat}% |
| %\def\char{\realbackslash char}% |
|
| \def\TeX{\realbackslash TeX}% |
\def\TeX{\realbackslash TeX}% |
| \def\dots{\realbackslash dots }% |
\def\dots{\realbackslash dots }% |
| \def\copyright{\realbackslash copyright }% |
\def\result{\realbackslash result}% |
| |
\def\equiv{\realbackslash equiv}% |
| |
\def\expansion{\realbackslash expansion}% |
| |
\def\print{\realbackslash print}% |
| |
\def\error{\realbackslash error}% |
| |
\def\point{\realbackslash point}% |
| |
\def\copyright{\realbackslash copyright}% |
| \def\tclose##1{\realbackslash tclose {##1}}% |
\def\tclose##1{\realbackslash tclose {##1}}% |
| \def\code##1{\realbackslash code {##1}}% |
\def\code##1{\realbackslash code {##1}}% |
| |
\def\uref##1{\realbackslash uref {##1}}% |
| |
\def\url##1{\realbackslash url {##1}}% |
| |
\def\env##1{\realbackslash env {##1}}% |
| |
\def\command##1{\realbackslash command {##1}}% |
| |
\def\option##1{\realbackslash option {##1}}% |
| \def\dotless##1{\realbackslash dotless {##1}}% |
\def\dotless##1{\realbackslash dotless {##1}}% |
| \def\samp##1{\realbackslash samp {##1}}% |
\def\samp##1{\realbackslash samp {##1}}% |
| \def\,##1{\realbackslash ,{##1}}% |
\def\,##1{\realbackslash ,{##1}}% |
|
Line 2199 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 2711 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| \def\r##1{\realbackslash r {##1}}% |
\def\r##1{\realbackslash r {##1}}% |
| \def\i##1{\realbackslash i {##1}}% |
\def\i##1{\realbackslash i {##1}}% |
| \def\b##1{\realbackslash b {##1}}% |
\def\b##1{\realbackslash b {##1}}% |
| |
\def\sc##1{\realbackslash sc {##1}}% |
| \def\cite##1{\realbackslash cite {##1}}% |
\def\cite##1{\realbackslash cite {##1}}% |
| \def\key##1{\realbackslash key {##1}}% |
\def\key##1{\realbackslash key {##1}}% |
| \def\file##1{\realbackslash file {##1}}% |
\def\file##1{\realbackslash file {##1}}% |
|
Line 2206 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 2719 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| \def\kbd##1{\realbackslash kbd {##1}}% |
\def\kbd##1{\realbackslash kbd {##1}}% |
| \def\dfn##1{\realbackslash dfn {##1}}% |
\def\dfn##1{\realbackslash dfn {##1}}% |
| \def\emph##1{\realbackslash emph {##1}}% |
\def\emph##1{\realbackslash emph {##1}}% |
| |
\def\acronym##1{\realbackslash acronym {##1}}% |
| |
% |
| |
% Handle some cases of @value -- where the variable name does not |
| |
% contain - or _, and the value does not contain any |
| |
% (non-fully-expandable) commands. |
| |
\let\value = \expandablevalue |
| |
% |
| \unsepspaces |
\unsepspaces |
| |
% Turn off macro expansion |
| |
\turnoffmacros |
| } |
} |
| |
|
| % If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces |
% If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces |
|
Line 2263 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 2785 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| %\let\tt=\indexdummyfont |
%\let\tt=\indexdummyfont |
| \let\tclose=\indexdummyfont |
\let\tclose=\indexdummyfont |
| \let\code=\indexdummyfont |
\let\code=\indexdummyfont |
| |
\let\url=\indexdummyfont |
| |
\let\uref=\indexdummyfont |
| |
\let\env=\indexdummyfont |
| |
\let\acronym=\indexdummyfont |
| |
\let\command=\indexdummyfont |
| |
\let\option=\indexdummyfont |
| \let\file=\indexdummyfont |
\let\file=\indexdummyfont |
| \let\samp=\indexdummyfont |
\let\samp=\indexdummyfont |
| \let\kbd=\indexdummyfont |
\let\kbd=\indexdummyfont |
|
Line 2278 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 2806 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| % so we do not become unable to do a definition. |
% so we do not become unable to do a definition. |
| |
|
| {\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\other |
{\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\other |
| @gdef@realbackslash{\}} |
@gdef@realbackslash{\}} |
| |
|
| \let\indexbackslash=0 %overridden during \printindex. |
\let\indexbackslash=0 %overridden during \printindex. |
| |
\let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)? |
| |
|
| |
% For \ifx comparisons. |
| |
\def\emptymacro{\empty} |
| |
|
| |
% Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case. |
| |
% |
| |
\def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}\empty} |
| |
|
| \let\SETmarginindex=\relax %initialize! |
% Workhorse for all \fooindexes. |
| % workhorse for all \fooindexes |
% #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry -- |
| % #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there |
% \empty if called from \doind, as we usually are. The main exception |
| \def\doind #1#2{% |
% is with defuns, which call us directly. |
| |
% |
| |
\def\dosubind#1#2#3{% |
| % Put the index entry in the margin if desired. |
% Put the index entry in the margin if desired. |
| \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else |
\ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else |
| \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt #2}}% |
\insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt #2}}% |
|
Line 2296 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 2834 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage |
\indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage |
| \escapechar=`\\ |
\escapechar=`\\ |
| {% |
{% |
| \let\folio=0 % We will expand all macros now EXCEPT \folio. |
\let\folio = 0% We will expand all macros now EXCEPT \folio. |
| \def\rawbackslashxx{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now |
\def\rawbackslashxx{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now |
| % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash. |
% so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash. |
| % |
% |
| % First process the index-string with all font commands turned off |
\def\thirdarg{#3}% |
| % to get the string to sort by. |
% |
| {\indexnofonts \xdef\indexsorttmp{#2}}% |
% If third arg is present, precede it with space in sort key. |
| |
\ifx\thirdarg\emptymacro |
| |
\let\subentry = \empty |
| |
\else |
| |
\def\subentry{ #3}% |
| |
\fi |
| |
% |
| |
% First process the index entry with all font commands turned |
| |
% off to get the string to sort by. |
| |
{\indexnofonts \xdef\indexsorttmp{#2\subentry}}% |
| % |
% |
| % Now produce the complete index entry, with both the sort key and the |
% Now the real index entry with the fonts. |
| % original text, including any font commands. |
|
| \toks0 = {#2}% |
\toks0 = {#2}% |
| |
% |
| |
% If third (subentry) arg is present, add it to the index |
| |
% string. And include a space. |
| |
\ifx\thirdarg\emptymacro \else |
| |
\toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0 \space #3}% |
| |
\fi |
| |
% |
| |
% Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key |
| |
% and the original text, including any font commands. We write |
| |
% three arguments to \entry to the .?? file, texindex reduces to |
| |
% two when writing the .??s sorted result. |
| \edef\temp{% |
\edef\temp{% |
| \write\csname#1indfile\endcsname{% |
\write\csname#1indfile\endcsname{% |
| \realbackslash entry{\indexsorttmp}{\folio}{\the\toks0}}% |
\realbackslash entry{\indexsorttmp}{\folio}{\the\toks0}}% |
| }% |
}% |
| \temp |
% |
| |
% If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it |
| |
% by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting |
| |
% the skip again. Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the |
| |
% \write will make \lastskip zero. The result is that sequences |
| |
% like this: |
| |
% @end defun |
| |
% @tindex whatever |
| |
% @defun ... |
| |
% will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the |
| |
% start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of |
| |
% the previous defun. |
| |
% |
| |
% But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode. We |
| |
% don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph. |
| |
% |
| |
% Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too. |
| |
% |
| |
\iflinks |
| |
\ifvmode |
| |
\skip0 = \lastskip |
| |
\ifdim\lastskip = 0pt \else \nobreak\vskip-\lastskip \fi |
| |
\fi |
| |
% |
| |
\temp % do the write |
| |
% |
| |
% |
| |
\ifvmode \ifdim\skip0 = 0pt \else \nobreak\vskip\skip0 \fi \fi |
| |
\fi |
| }% |
}% |
| }% |
}% |
| \penalty\count255 |
\penalty\count255 |
| }% |
}% |
| } |
} |
| |
|
| \def\dosubind #1#2#3{% |
|
| {\count10=\lastpenalty % |
|
| {\indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage |
|
| \escapechar=`\\% |
|
| {\let\folio=0% |
|
| \def\rawbackslashxx{\indexbackslash}% |
|
| % |
|
| % Now process the index-string once, with all font commands turned off, |
|
| % to get the string to sort the index by. |
|
| {\indexnofonts |
|
| \xdef\temp1{#2 #3}% |
|
| }% |
|
| % Now produce the complete index entry. We process the index-string again, |
|
| % this time with font commands expanded, to get what to print in the index. |
|
| \edef\temp{% |
|
| \write \csname#1indfile\endcsname{% |
|
| \realbackslash entry {\temp1}{\folio}{#2}{#3}}}% |
|
| \temp }% |
|
| }\penalty\count10}} |
|
| |
|
| % The index entry written in the file actually looks like |
% The index entry written in the file actually looks like |
| % \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic} |
% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic} |
| % or |
% or |
|
Line 2370 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 2935 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| |
|
| % Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material. |
% Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material. |
| |
|
| % This is what you call to cause a particular index to get printed. |
% @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed. |
| % Write |
% It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered). |
| % @unnumbered Function Index |
% |
| % @printindex fn |
|
| |
|
| \def\printindex{\parsearg\doprintindex} |
\def\printindex{\parsearg\doprintindex} |
| |
|
| \def\doprintindex#1{\begingroup |
\def\doprintindex#1{\begingroup |
| \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}% |
\dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}% |
| % |
% |
| \indexfonts \rm |
\smallfonts \rm |
| \tolerance = 9500 |
\tolerance = 9500 |
| \indexbreaks |
\indexbreaks |
| \def\indexbackslash{\rawbackslashxx}% |
|
| % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape |
|
| % character. It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change |
|
| % to make right now. |
|
| \catcode`\\ = 0 |
|
| \catcode`\@ = 11 |
|
| \escapechar = `\\ |
|
| \begindoublecolumns |
|
| % |
% |
| % See if the index file exists and is nonempty. |
% See if the index file exists and is nonempty. |
| |
% Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains |
| |
% \initial {@} |
| |
% as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces |
| |
% (because it thinks @} is a control sequence). |
| |
\catcode`\@ = 11 |
| \openin 1 \jobname.#1s |
\openin 1 \jobname.#1s |
| \ifeof 1 |
\ifeof 1 |
| % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index, |
% \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index, |
| % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the |
% and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the |
| % index. The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure |
% index. The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure |
| % there is some text. |
% there is some text. |
| (Index is nonexistent) |
\putwordIndexNonexistent |
| \else |
\else |
| % |
% |
| % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof |
% If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof |
|
Line 2407 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 2966 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| % it can discover if there is anything in it. |
% it can discover if there is anything in it. |
| \read 1 to \temp |
\read 1 to \temp |
| \ifeof 1 |
\ifeof 1 |
| (Index is empty) |
\putwordIndexIsEmpty |
| \else |
\else |
| |
% Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape |
| |
% character. It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change |
| |
% to make right now. |
| |
\def\indexbackslash{\rawbackslashxx}% |
| |
\catcode`\\ = 0 |
| |
\escapechar = `\\ |
| |
\begindoublecolumns |
| \input \jobname.#1s |
\input \jobname.#1s |
| |
\enddoublecolumns |
| \fi |
\fi |
| \fi |
\fi |
| \closein 1 |
\closein 1 |
| \enddoublecolumns |
|
| \endgroup} |
\endgroup} |
| |
|
| % These macros are used by the sorted index file itself. |
% These macros are used by the sorted index file itself. |
| % Change them to control the appearance of the index. |
% Change them to control the appearance of the index. |
| |
|
| % Same as \bigskipamount except no shrink. |
\def\initial#1{{% |
| % \balancecolumns gets confused if there is any shrink. |
% Some minor font changes for the special characters. |
| \newskip\initialskipamount \initialskipamount 12pt plus4pt |
\let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt |
| |
% |
| \def\initial #1{% |
% Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own. |
| {\let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt |
\removelastskip |
| \ifdim\lastskip<\initialskipamount |
% |
| \removelastskip \penalty-200 \vskip \initialskipamount\fi |
% We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus. |
| \line{\secbf#1\hfill}\kern 2pt\penalty10000}} |
\penalty -300 |
| |
% |
| |
% Typeset the initial. Making this add up to a whole number of |
| |
% baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column |
| |
% to column. It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch |
| |
% we need before each entry, but it's better. |
| |
% |
| |
% No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns. |
| |
\vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip |
| |
\leftline{\secbf #1}% |
| |
\vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip |
| |
% |
| |
% Do our best not to break after the initial. |
| |
\nobreak |
| |
}} |
| |
|
| % This typesets a paragraph consisting of #1, dot leaders, and then #2 |
% This typesets a paragraph consisting of #1, dot leaders, and then #2 |
| % flush to the right margin. It is used for index and table of contents |
% flush to the right margin. It is used for index and table of contents |
| % entries. The paragraph is indented by \leftskip. |
% entries. The paragraph is indented by \leftskip. |
| % |
% |
| \def\entry #1#2{\begingroup |
\def\entry#1#2{\begingroup |
| % |
% |
| % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't |
% Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't |
| % affect previous text. |
% affect previous text. |
|
Line 2456 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 3036 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| % |
% |
| % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start |
% \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start |
| % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that. |
% of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that. |
| \hangindent=2em |
\hangindent = 2em |
| % |
% |
| % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line |
% When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line |
| % with blank space. |
% with blank space. |
| \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil |
\rightskip = 0pt plus1fil |
| % |
% |
| |
% A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing columns. |
| |
\vskip 0pt plus1pt |
| |
% |
| % Start a ``paragraph'' for the index entry so the line breaking |
% Start a ``paragraph'' for the index entry so the line breaking |
| % parameters we've set above will have an effect. |
% parameters we've set above will have an effect. |
| \noindent |
\noindent |
|
Line 2486 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 3069 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as |
% The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as |
| % part of (the primitive) \par. Without it, a spurious underfull |
% part of (the primitive) \par. Without it, a spurious underfull |
| % \hbox ensues. |
% \hbox ensues. |
| \ #2% The page number ends the paragraph. |
\ifpdf |
| |
\pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph. |
| |
\else |
| |
\ #2% The page number ends the paragraph. |
| |
\fi |
| \fi% |
\fi% |
| \par |
\par |
| \endgroup} |
\endgroup} |
|
Line 2515 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 3102 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| |
|
| \def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns |
\def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns |
| % Grab any single-column material above us. |
% Grab any single-column material above us. |
| \output = {\global\setbox\partialpage |
\output = {% |
| =\vbox{\unvbox255\kern -\topskip \kern \baselineskip}}% |
% |
| \eject |
% Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a |
| |
% whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output |
| |
% routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is |
| |
% essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off). In |
| |
% that case we just ship out what is in \partialpage with the normal |
| |
% output routine. Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this |
| |
% runs and this will be a no-op. See the indexspread.tex test case. |
| |
\ifvoid\partialpage \else |
| |
\onepageout{\pagecontents\partialpage}% |
| |
\fi |
| |
% |
| |
\global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{% |
| |
% Unvbox the main output page. |
| |
\unvbox\PAGE |
| |
\kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip |
| |
}% |
| |
}% |
| |
\eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage |
| % |
% |
| % Now switch to the double-column output routine. |
% Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages. |
| \output={\doublecolumnout}% |
\output = {\doublecolumnout}% |
| % |
% |
| % Change the page size parameters. We could do this once outside this |
% Change the page size parameters. We could do this once outside this |
| % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11 |
% routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11 |
| % format, but then we repeat the same computation. Repeating a couple |
% format, but then we repeat the same computation. Repeating a couple |
| % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the |
% of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the |
| % execution time, so we may as well do it once. |
% execution time, so we may as well do it in one place. |
| % |
% |
| % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between |
% First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between |
| % the columns. We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it |
% the columns. We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it |
| % changes automatically with the paper format. The magic constant |
% changes automatically with the paper format. The magic constant |
| % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +- < |
% below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt) |
| % 1pt) as it did when we hard-coded it. |
% as it did when we hard-coded it. |
| % |
% |
| % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we |
% We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we |
| % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially) |
% can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially) |
|
Line 2545 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 3149 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| % |
% |
| % Double the \vsize as well. (We don't need a separate register here, |
% Double the \vsize as well. (We don't need a separate register here, |
| % since nobody clobbers \vsize.) |
% since nobody clobbers \vsize.) |
| |
\advance\vsize by -\ht\partialpage |
| \vsize = 2\vsize |
\vsize = 2\vsize |
| } |
} |
| |
|
| |
% The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except |
| |
% the last. |
| |
% |
| \def\doublecolumnout{% |
\def\doublecolumnout{% |
| \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth |
\splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth |
| % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal |
% Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal |
| % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the |
% (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the |
| % previous page. |
% previous page. |
| \dimen@=\pageheight \advance\dimen@ by-\ht\partialpage |
\dimen@ = \vsize |
| % box0 will be the left-hand column, box1 the right. |
\divide\dimen@ by 2 |
| |
% |
| |
% box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right. |
| \setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ |
\setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ |
| \onepageout\pagesofar |
\onepageout\pagesofar |
| \unvbox255 \penalty\outputpenalty |
\unvbox255 |
| |
\penalty\outputpenalty |
| } |
} |
| \def\pagesofar{% |
\def\pagesofar{% |
| % The contents of the output page -- any previous material, |
% Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material, |
| % followed by the two boxes we just split. |
% followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2. |
| \unvbox\partialpage |
\unvbox\partialpage |
| |
% |
| \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize |
\hsize = \doublecolumnhsize |
| \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize \hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}% |
\wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize |
| |
\hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}% |
| } |
} |
| \def\enddoublecolumns{% |
\def\enddoublecolumns{% |
| \output={\balancecolumns}\eject % split what we have |
\output = {% |
| \endgroup |
% Split the last of the double-column material. Leave it on the |
| % Back to normal single-column typesetting, but take account of the |
% current page, no automatic page break. |
| % fact that we just accumulated some stuff on the output page. |
\balancecolumns |
| \pagegoal=\vsize |
% |
| |
% If we end up splitting too much material for the current page, |
| |
% though, there will be another page break right after this \output |
| |
% invocation ends. Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not |
| |
% want to call it again. Therefore, reset \output to its normal |
| |
% definition right away. (We hope \balancecolumns will never be |
| |
% called on to balance too much material, but if it is, this makes |
| |
% the output somewhat more palatable.) |
| |
\global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}% |
| |
}% |
| |
\eject |
| |
\endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns |
| |
% |
| |
% \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted |
| |
% the current page. We're now back to normal single-column |
| |
% typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize (after the |
| |
% \endgroup where \vsize got restored). |
| |
\pagegoal = \vsize |
| } |
} |
| \def\balancecolumns{% |
\def\balancecolumns{% |
| % Called on the last page of the double column material. |
% Called at the end of the double column material. |
| \setbox0=\vbox{\unvbox255}% |
\setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120. |
| \dimen@ = \ht0 |
\dimen@ = \ht0 |
| \advance\dimen@ by \topskip |
\advance\dimen@ by \topskip |
| \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip |
\advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip |
| \divide\dimen@ by 2 |
\divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to |
| |
%debug\message{final 2-column material height=\the\ht0, target=\the\dimen@.}% |
| \splittopskip = \topskip |
\splittopskip = \topskip |
| % Loop until we get a decent breakpoint. |
% Loop until we get a decent breakpoint. |
| {\vbadness=10000 \loop \global\setbox3=\copy0 |
{% |
| \global\setbox1=\vsplit3 to\dimen@ |
\vbadness = 10000 |
| \ifdim\ht3>\dimen@ \global\advance\dimen@ by1pt \repeat}% |
\loop |
| |
\global\setbox3 = \copy0 |
| |
\global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@ |
| |
\ifdim\ht3>\dimen@ |
| |
\global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt |
| |
\repeat |
| |
}% |
| |
%debug\message{split to \the\dimen@, column heights: \the\ht1, \the\ht3.}% |
| \setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}% |
\setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}% |
| \setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}% |
\setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}% |
| |
% |
| \pagesofar |
\pagesofar |
| } |
} |
| \catcode `\@=\other |
\catcode`\@ = \other |
| |
|
| |
|
| \message{sectioning,} |
\message{sectioning,} |
| % Define chapters, sections, etc. |
% Chapters, sections, etc. |
| |
|
| \newcount \chapno |
\newcount\chapno |
| \newcount \secno \secno=0 |
\newcount\secno \secno=0 |
| \newcount \subsecno \subsecno=0 |
\newcount\subsecno \subsecno=0 |
| \newcount \subsubsecno \subsubsecno=0 |
\newcount\subsubsecno \subsubsecno=0 |
| |
|
| % This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ... |
% This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ... |
| \newcount \appendixno \appendixno = `\@ |
\newcount\appendixno \appendixno = `\@ |
| \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno} |
% \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno} |
| |
% We do the following for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual |
| \newwrite \contentsfile |
% letter in the expansion, not just typeset. |
| % This is called from \setfilename. |
\def\appendixletter{% |
| \def\opencontents{\openout \contentsfile = \jobname.toc} |
\ifnum\appendixno=`A A% |
| |
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B% |
| |
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C% |
| |
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D% |
| |
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E% |
| |
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F% |
| |
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G% |
| |
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H% |
| |
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I% |
| |
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J% |
| |
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K% |
| |
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L% |
| |
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M% |
| |
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N% |
| |
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O% |
| |
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P% |
| |
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q% |
| |
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R% |
| |
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S% |
| |
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T% |
| |
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U% |
| |
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V% |
| |
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W% |
| |
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X% |
| |
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y% |
| |
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z% |
| |
% The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is |
| |
% expanded while writing the .toc file. \char\appendixno is not |
| |
% expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out |
| |
% with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it. |
| |
\else\char\the\appendixno |
| |
\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi |
| |
\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi} |
| |
|
| % Each @chapter defines this as the name of the chapter. |
% Each @chapter defines this as the name of the chapter. |
| % page headings and footings can use it. @section does likewise |
% page headings and footings can use it. @section does likewise. |
| |
\def\thischapter{} |
| \def\thischapter{} \def\thissection{} |
\def\thissection{} |
| \def\seccheck#1{\if \pageno<0 % |
|
| \errmessage{@#1 not allowed after generating table of contents}\fi |
|
| % |
|
| } |
|
| |
|
| \def\chapternofonts{% |
|
| \let\rawbackslash=\relax% |
|
| \let\frenchspacing=\relax% |
|
| \def\result{\realbackslash result} |
|
| \def\equiv{\realbackslash equiv} |
|
| \def\expansion{\realbackslash expansion} |
|
| \def\print{\realbackslash print} |
|
| \def\TeX{\realbackslash TeX} |
|
| \def\dots{\realbackslash dots} |
|
| \def\copyright{\realbackslash copyright} |
|
| \def\tt{\realbackslash tt} |
|
| \def\bf{\realbackslash bf } |
|
| \def\w{\realbackslash w} |
|
| \def\less{\realbackslash less} |
|
| \def\gtr{\realbackslash gtr} |
|
| \def\hat{\realbackslash hat} |
|
| \def\char{\realbackslash char} |
|
| \def\tclose##1{\realbackslash tclose {##1}} |
|
| \def\code##1{\realbackslash code {##1}} |
|
| \def\samp##1{\realbackslash samp {##1}} |
|
| \def\r##1{\realbackslash r {##1}} |
|
| \def\b##1{\realbackslash b {##1}} |
|
| \def\key##1{\realbackslash key {##1}} |
|
| \def\file##1{\realbackslash file {##1}} |
|
| \def\kbd##1{\realbackslash kbd {##1}} |
|
| % These are redefined because @smartitalic wouldn't work inside xdef. |
|
| \def\i##1{\realbackslash i {##1}} |
|
| \def\cite##1{\realbackslash cite {##1}} |
|
| \def\var##1{\realbackslash var {##1}} |
|
| \def\emph##1{\realbackslash emph {##1}} |
|
| \def\dfn##1{\realbackslash dfn {##1}} |
|
| } |
|
| |
|
| \newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level |
\newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level |
| \newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raise/lowersections modify this count |
\newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raise/lowersections modify this count |
|
Line 2719 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 3354 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| \fi |
\fi |
| } |
} |
| |
|
| |
% @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered. |
| \def\thischaptername{No Chapter Title} |
\def\thischaptername{No Chapter Title} |
| \outer\def\chapter{\parsearg\chapteryyy} |
\outer\def\chapter{\parsearg\chapteryyy} |
| \def\chapteryyy #1{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz |
\def\chapteryyy #1{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz |
| \def\chapterzzz #1{\seccheck{chapter}% |
\def\chapterzzz #1{% |
| \secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 |
\secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 |
| \global\advance \chapno by 1 \message{\putwordChapter \the\chapno}% |
\global\advance \chapno by 1 \message{\putwordChapter\space \the\chapno}% |
| \chapmacro {#1}{\the\chapno}% |
\chapmacro {#1}{\the\chapno}% |
| \gdef\thissection{#1}% |
\gdef\thissection{#1}% |
| \gdef\thischaptername{#1}% |
\gdef\thischaptername{#1}% |
| % We don't substitute the actual chapter name into \thischapter |
% We don't substitute the actual chapter name into \thischapter |
| % because we don't want its macros evaluated now. |
% because we don't want its macros evaluated now. |
| \xdef\thischapter{\putwordChapter{} \the\chapno: \noexpand\thischaptername}% |
\xdef\thischapter{\putwordChapter{} \the\chapno: \noexpand\thischaptername}% |
| {\chapternofonts% |
\toks0 = {#1}% |
| \edef\temp{{\realbackslash chapentry {#1}{\the\chapno}{\noexpand\folio}}}% |
\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash chapentry{\the\toks0}% |
| \escapechar=`\\% |
{\the\chapno}}}% |
| \write \contentsfile \temp % |
\temp |
| \donoderef % |
\donoderef |
| \global\let\section = \numberedsec |
\global\let\section = \numberedsec |
| \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec |
\global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec |
| \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec |
\global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec |
| }} |
} |
| |
|
| \outer\def\appendix{\parsearg\appendixyyy} |
\outer\def\appendix{\parsearg\appendixyyy} |
| \def\appendixyyy #1{\apphead0{#1}} % normally apphead0 calls appendixzzz |
\def\appendixyyy #1{\apphead0{#1}} % normally apphead0 calls appendixzzz |
| \def\appendixzzz #1{\seccheck{appendix}% |
\def\appendixzzz #1{% |
| \secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 |
\secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 |
| \global\advance \appendixno by 1 \message{Appendix \appendixletter}% |
\global\advance \appendixno by 1 |
| |
\message{\putwordAppendix\space \appendixletter}% |
| \chapmacro {#1}{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter}% |
\chapmacro {#1}{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter}% |
| \gdef\thissection{#1}% |
\gdef\thissection{#1}% |
| \gdef\thischaptername{#1}% |
\gdef\thischaptername{#1}% |
| \xdef\thischapter{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter: \noexpand\thischaptername}% |
\xdef\thischapter{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter: \noexpand\thischaptername}% |
| {\chapternofonts% |
\toks0 = {#1}% |
| \edef\temp{{\realbackslash chapentry |
\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash chapentry{\the\toks0}% |
| {#1}{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter}{\noexpand\folio}}}% |
{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter}}}% |
| \escapechar=`\\% |
\temp |
| \write \contentsfile \temp % |
\appendixnoderef |
| \appendixnoderef % |
|
| \global\let\section = \appendixsec |
\global\let\section = \appendixsec |
| \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec |
\global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec |
| \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec |
\global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec |
| }} |
} |
| |
|
| % @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered. |
% @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered. |
| \outer\def\centerchap{\parsearg\centerchapyyy} |
\outer\def\centerchap{\parsearg\centerchapyyy} |
| \def\centerchapyyy #1{{\let\unnumbchapmacro=\centerchapmacro \unnumberedyyy{#1}}} |
\def\centerchapyyy #1{{\let\unnumbchapmacro=\centerchapmacro \unnumberedyyy{#1}}} |
| |
|
| |
% @top is like @unnumbered. |
| \outer\def\top{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy} |
\outer\def\top{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy} |
| |
|
| \outer\def\unnumbered{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy} |
\outer\def\unnumbered{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy} |
| \def\unnumberedyyy #1{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz |
\def\unnumberedyyy #1{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz |
| \def\unnumberedzzz #1{\seccheck{unnumbered}% |
\def\unnumberedzzz #1{% |
| \secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 |
\secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 |
| % |
% |
| % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the |
% This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the |
|
Line 2781 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 3418 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear |
% Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear |
| % as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself. We use |
% as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself. We use |
| % \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once, |
% \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once, |
| % simply yielding the contents of the <toks register>. |
% simply yielding the contents of <toks register>. (We also do this for |
| |
% the toc entries.) |
| \toks0 = {#1}\message{(\the\toks0)}% |
\toks0 = {#1}\message{(\the\toks0)}% |
| % |
% |
| \unnumbchapmacro {#1}% |
\unnumbchapmacro {#1}% |
| \gdef\thischapter{#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}% |
\gdef\thischapter{#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}% |
| {\chapternofonts% |
\toks0 = {#1}% |
| \edef\temp{{\realbackslash unnumbchapentry {#1}{\noexpand\folio}}}% |
\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbchapentry{\the\toks0}}}% |
| \escapechar=`\\% |
\temp |
| \write \contentsfile \temp % |
\unnumbnoderef |
| \unnumbnoderef % |
|
| \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec |
\global\let\section = \unnumberedsec |
| \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec |
\global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec |
| \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec |
\global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec |
| }} |
} |
| |
|
| |
% Sections. |
| \outer\def\numberedsec{\parsearg\secyyy} |
\outer\def\numberedsec{\parsearg\secyyy} |
| \def\secyyy #1{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz |
\def\secyyy #1{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz |
| \def\seczzz #1{\seccheck{section}% |
\def\seczzz #1{% |
| \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \secno by 1 % |
\subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \secno by 1 % |
| \gdef\thissection{#1}\secheading {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}% |
\gdef\thissection{#1}\secheading {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}% |
| {\chapternofonts% |
\toks0 = {#1}% |
| \edef\temp{{\realbackslash secentry % |
\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash secentry{\the\toks0}% |
| {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\noexpand\folio}}}% |
{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}}}% |
| \escapechar=`\\% |
\temp |
| \write \contentsfile \temp % |
\donoderef |
| \donoderef % |
\nobreak |
| \penalty 10000 % |
} |
| }} |
|
| |
|
| \outer\def\appendixsection{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy} |
\outer\def\appendixsection{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy} |
| \outer\def\appendixsec{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy} |
\outer\def\appendixsec{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy} |
| \def\appendixsecyyy #1{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsectionzzz |
\def\appendixsecyyy #1{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsectionzzz |
| \def\appendixsectionzzz #1{\seccheck{appendixsection}% |
\def\appendixsectionzzz #1{% |
| \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \secno by 1 % |
\subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \secno by 1 % |
| \gdef\thissection{#1}\secheading {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}% |
\gdef\thissection{#1}\secheading {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}% |
| {\chapternofonts% |
\toks0 = {#1}% |
| \edef\temp{{\realbackslash secentry % |
\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash secentry{\the\toks0}% |
| {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\noexpand\folio}}}% |
{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}}}% |
| \escapechar=`\\% |
\temp |
| \write \contentsfile \temp % |
\appendixnoderef |
| \appendixnoderef % |
\nobreak |
| \penalty 10000 % |
} |
| }} |
|
| |
|
| \outer\def\unnumberedsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsecyyy} |
\outer\def\unnumberedsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsecyyy} |
| \def\unnumberedsecyyy #1{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedseczzz |
\def\unnumberedsecyyy #1{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedseczzz |
| \def\unnumberedseczzz #1{\seccheck{unnumberedsec}% |
\def\unnumberedseczzz #1{% |
| \plainsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}% |
\plainsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}% |
| {\chapternofonts% |
\toks0 = {#1}% |
| \edef\temp{{\realbackslash unnumbsecentry{#1}{\noexpand\folio}}}% |
\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbsecentry{\the\toks0}}}% |
| \escapechar=`\\% |
\temp |
| \write \contentsfile \temp % |
\unnumbnoderef |
| \unnumbnoderef % |
\nobreak |
| \penalty 10000 % |
} |
| }} |
|
| |
|
| |
% Subsections. |
| \outer\def\numberedsubsec{\parsearg\numberedsubsecyyy} |
\outer\def\numberedsubsec{\parsearg\numberedsubsecyyy} |
| \def\numberedsubsecyyy #1{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubseczzz |
\def\numberedsubsecyyy #1{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubseczzz |
| \def\numberedsubseczzz #1{\seccheck{subsection}% |
\def\numberedsubseczzz #1{% |
| \gdef\thissection{#1}\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \subsecno by 1 % |
\gdef\thissection{#1}\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \subsecno by 1 % |
| \subsecheading {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}% |
\subsecheading {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}% |
| {\chapternofonts% |
\toks0 = {#1}% |
| \edef\temp{{\realbackslash subsecentry % |
\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsecentry{\the\toks0}% |
| {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\noexpand\folio}}}% |
{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}}}% |
| \escapechar=`\\% |
\temp |
| \write \contentsfile \temp % |
\donoderef |
| \donoderef % |
\nobreak |
| \penalty 10000 % |
} |
| }} |
|
| |
|
| \outer\def\appendixsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsecyyy} |
\outer\def\appendixsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsecyyy} |
| \def\appendixsubsecyyy #1{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubseczzz |
\def\appendixsubsecyyy #1{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubseczzz |
| \def\appendixsubseczzz #1{\seccheck{appendixsubsec}% |
\def\appendixsubseczzz #1{% |
| \gdef\thissection{#1}\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \subsecno by 1 % |
\gdef\thissection{#1}\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \subsecno by 1 % |
| \subsecheading {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}% |
\subsecheading {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}% |
| {\chapternofonts% |
\toks0 = {#1}% |
| \edef\temp{{\realbackslash subsecentry % |
\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsecentry{\the\toks0}% |
| {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\noexpand\folio}}}% |
{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}}}% |
| \escapechar=`\\% |
\temp |
| \write \contentsfile \temp % |
\appendixnoderef |
| \appendixnoderef % |
\nobreak |
| \penalty 10000 % |
} |
| }} |
|
| |
|
| \outer\def\unnumberedsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsecyyy} |
\outer\def\unnumberedsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsecyyy} |
| \def\unnumberedsubsecyyy #1{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz |
\def\unnumberedsubsecyyy #1{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz |
| \def\unnumberedsubseczzz #1{\seccheck{unnumberedsubsec}% |
\def\unnumberedsubseczzz #1{% |
| \plainsubsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}% |
\plainsubsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}% |
| {\chapternofonts% |
\toks0 = {#1}% |
| \edef\temp{{\realbackslash unnumbsubsecentry{#1}{\noexpand\folio}}}% |
\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbsubsecentry% |
| \escapechar=`\\% |
{\the\toks0}}}% |
| \write \contentsfile \temp % |
\temp |
| \unnumbnoderef % |
\unnumbnoderef |
| \penalty 10000 % |
\nobreak |
| }} |
} |
| |
|
| |
% Subsubsections. |
| \outer\def\numberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\numberedsubsubsecyyy} |
\outer\def\numberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\numberedsubsubsecyyy} |
| \def\numberedsubsubsecyyy #1{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubseczzz |
\def\numberedsubsubsecyyy #1{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubseczzz |
| \def\numberedsubsubseczzz #1{\seccheck{subsubsection}% |
\def\numberedsubsubseczzz #1{% |
| \gdef\thissection{#1}\global\advance \subsubsecno by 1 % |
\gdef\thissection{#1}\global\advance \subsubsecno by 1 % |
| \subsubsecheading {#1} |
\subsubsecheading {#1} |
| {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}% |
{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}% |
| {\chapternofonts% |
\toks0 = {#1}% |
| \edef\temp{{\realbackslash subsubsecentry % |
\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsubsecentry{\the\toks0}% |
| {#1} |
{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}}}% |
| {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno} |
\temp |
| {\noexpand\folio}}}% |
\donoderef |
| \escapechar=`\\% |
\nobreak |
| \write \contentsfile \temp % |
} |
| \donoderef % |
|
| \penalty 10000 % |
|
| }} |
|
| |
|
| \outer\def\appendixsubsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsubsecyyy} |
\outer\def\appendixsubsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsubsecyyy} |
| \def\appendixsubsubsecyyy #1{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubseczzz |
\def\appendixsubsubsecyyy #1{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubseczzz |
| \def\appendixsubsubseczzz #1{\seccheck{appendixsubsubsec}% |
\def\appendixsubsubseczzz #1{% |
| \gdef\thissection{#1}\global\advance \subsubsecno by 1 % |
\gdef\thissection{#1}\global\advance \subsubsecno by 1 % |
| \subsubsecheading {#1} |
\subsubsecheading {#1} |
| {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}% |
{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}% |
| {\chapternofonts% |
\toks0 = {#1}% |
| \edef\temp{{\realbackslash subsubsecentry{#1}% |
\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsubsecentry{\the\toks0}% |
| {\appendixletter} |
{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}}}% |
| {\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}{\noexpand\folio}}}% |
\temp |
| \escapechar=`\\% |
\appendixnoderef |
| \write \contentsfile \temp % |
\nobreak |
| \appendixnoderef % |
} |
| \penalty 10000 % |
|
| }} |
|
| |
|
| \outer\def\unnumberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy} |
\outer\def\unnumberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy} |
| \def\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy #1{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz |
\def\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy #1{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz |
| \def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz #1{\seccheck{unnumberedsubsubsec}% |
\def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz #1{% |
| \plainsubsubsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}% |
\plainsubsubsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}% |
| {\chapternofonts% |
\toks0 = {#1}% |
| \edef\temp{{\realbackslash unnumbsubsubsecentry{#1}{\noexpand\folio}}}% |
\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbsubsubsecentry% |
| \escapechar=`\\% |
{\the\toks0}}}% |
| \write \contentsfile \temp % |
\temp |
| \unnumbnoderef % |
\unnumbnoderef |
| \penalty 10000 % |
\nobreak |
| }} |
} |
| |
|
| % These are variants which are not "outer", so they can appear in @ifinfo. |
% These are variants which are not "outer", so they can appear in @ifinfo. |
| % Actually, they should now be obsolete; ordinary section commands should work. |
% Actually, they should now be obsolete; ordinary section commands should work. |
|
Line 2949 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 3579 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| |
|
| % Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading |
% Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading |
| |
|
| % NOTE on use of \vbox for chapter headings, section headings, and |
% NOTE on use of \vbox for chapter headings, section headings, and such: |
| % such: |
|
| % 1) We use \vbox rather than the earlier \line to permit |
% 1) We use \vbox rather than the earlier \line to permit |
| % overlong headings to fold. |
% overlong headings to fold. |
| % 2) \hyphenpenalty is set to 10000 because hyphenation in a |
% 2) \hyphenpenalty is set to 10000 because hyphenation in a |
|
Line 2997 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 3626 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| |
|
| \def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname} |
\def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname} |
| |
|
| \def\CHAPPAGoff{ |
\def\CHAPPAGoff{% |
| \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager |
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager |
| \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak |
\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak |
| \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager} |
\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager} |
| |
|
| \def\CHAPPAGon{ |
\def\CHAPPAGon{% |
| \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager |
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager |
| \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager |
\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager |
| \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager |
\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager |
|
Line 3056 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 3685 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| \def\unnchfopen #1{% |
\def\unnchfopen #1{% |
| \chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 |
\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 |
| \parindent=0pt\raggedright |
\parindent=0pt\raggedright |
| \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 10000 % |
\rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak |
| } |
} |
| |
|
| \def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts |
\def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts |
|
Line 3067 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 3696 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| \def\centerchfopen #1{% |
\def\centerchfopen #1{% |
| \chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 |
\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 |
| \parindent=0pt |
\parindent=0pt |
| \hfill {\rm #1}\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 10000 % |
\hfill {\rm #1}\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak |
| } |
} |
| |
|
| \def\CHAPFopen{ |
\def\CHAPFopen{ |
|
Line 3096 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 3725 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| |
|
| |
|
| % Print any size section title. |
% Print any size section title. |
| % |
% |
| % #1 is the section type (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #2 is the section |
% #1 is the section type (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #2 is the section |
| % number (maybe empty), #3 the text. |
% number (maybe empty), #3 the text. |
| \def\sectionheading#1#2#3{% |
\def\sectionheading#1#2#3{% |
|
Line 3120 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 3749 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| } |
} |
| |
|
| |
|
| \message{toc printing,} |
\message{toc,} |
| % Finish up the main text and prepare to read what we've written |
% Table of contents. |
| % to \contentsfile. |
\newwrite\tocfile |
| |
|
| |
% Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary. |
| |
% Called from @chapter, etc. We supply {\folio} at the end of the |
| |
% argument, which will end up as the last argument to the \...entry macro. |
| |
% |
| |
% We open the .toc file here instead of at @setfilename or any other |
| |
% given time so that @contents can be put in the document anywhere. |
| |
% |
| |
\newif\iftocfileopened |
| |
\def\writetocentry#1{% |
| |
\iftocfileopened\else |
| |
\immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc |
| |
\global\tocfileopenedtrue |
| |
\fi |
| |
\iflinks \write\tocfile{#1{\folio}}\fi |
| |
} |
| |
|
| \newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in |
\newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in |
| |
\newcount\savepageno |
| |
\newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1 |
| |
|
| |
% Finish up the main text and prepare to read what we've written |
| |
% to \tocfile. |
| |
% |
| \def\startcontents#1{% |
\def\startcontents#1{% |
| % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should |
% If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should |
| % start on an odd page, unlike chapters. Thus, we maintain |
% start on an odd page, unlike chapters. Thus, we maintain |
| % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro. |
% \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro. |
| % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se> |
% From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se> |
| \contentsalignmacro |
\contentsalignmacro |
| \immediate\closeout \contentsfile |
\immediate\closeout\tocfile |
| \ifnum \pageno>0 |
% |
| \pageno = -1 % Request roman numbered pages. |
|
| \fi |
|
| % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline. |
% Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline. |
| % It is abundantly clear what they are. |
% It is abundantly clear what they are. |
| \unnumbchapmacro{#1}\def\thischapter{}% |
\unnumbchapmacro{#1}\def\thischapter{}% |
| |
\savepageno = \pageno |
| \begingroup % Set up to handle contents files properly. |
\begingroup % Set up to handle contents files properly. |
| \catcode`\\=0 \catcode`\{=1 \catcode`\}=2 \catcode`\@=11 |
\catcode`\\=0 \catcode`\{=1 \catcode`\}=2 \catcode`\@=11 |
| \catcode`\^=7 % to see ^^e4 as \"a etc. juha@piuha.ydi.vtt.fi |
% We can't do this, because then an actual ^ in a section |
| |
% title fails, e.g., @chapter ^ -- exponentiation. --karl, 9jul97. |
| |
%\catcode`\^=7 % to see ^^e4 as \"a etc. juha@piuha.ydi.vtt.fi |
| \raggedbottom % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom. |
\raggedbottom % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom. |
| \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length. |
\advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length. |
| |
% |
| |
% Roman numerals for page numbers. |
| |
\ifnum \pageno>0 \pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi |
| } |
} |
| |
|
| |
|
| % Normal (long) toc. |
% Normal (long) toc. |
| \outer\def\contents{% |
\def\contents{% |
| \startcontents{\putwordTableofContents}% |
\startcontents{\putwordTOC}% |
| \input \jobname.toc |
\openin 1 \jobname.toc |
| |
\ifeof 1 \else |
| |
\closein 1 |
| |
\input \jobname.toc |
| |
\fi |
| |
\vfill \eject |
| |
\contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect |
| |
\pdfmakeoutlines |
| \endgroup |
\endgroup |
| \vfill \eject |
\lastnegativepageno = \pageno |
| |
\pageno = \savepageno |
| } |
} |
| |
|
| % And just the chapters. |
% And just the chapters. |
| \outer\def\summarycontents{% |
\def\summarycontents{% |
| \startcontents{\putwordShortContents}% |
\startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}% |
| % |
% |
| \let\chapentry = \shortchapentry |
\let\chapentry = \shortchapentry |
| \let\unnumbchapentry = \shortunnumberedentry |
\let\unnumbchapentry = \shortunnumberedentry |
|
Line 3172 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 3835 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| \def\unnumbsubsecentry ##1##2{} |
\def\unnumbsubsecentry ##1##2{} |
| \def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{} |
\def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{} |
| \def\unnumbsubsubsecentry ##1##2{} |
\def\unnumbsubsubsecentry ##1##2{} |
| \input \jobname.toc |
\openin 1 \jobname.toc |
| |
\ifeof 1 \else |
| |
\closein 1 |
| |
\input \jobname.toc |
| |
\fi |
| |
\vfill \eject |
| |
\contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect |
| \endgroup |
\endgroup |
| \vfill \eject |
\lastnegativepageno = \pageno |
| |
\pageno = \savepageno |
| } |
} |
| \let\shortcontents = \summarycontents |
\let\shortcontents = \summarycontents |
| |
|
| |
\ifpdf |
| |
\pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines}% |
| |
\fi |
| |
|
| % These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents. |
% These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents. |
| % The first argument is the chapter or section name. |
% The first argument is the chapter or section name. |
| % The last argument is the page number. |
% The last argument is the page number. |
|
Line 3188 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 3862 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| |
|
| % See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings |
% See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings |
| \def\shortchapentry#1#2#3{% |
\def\shortchapentry#1#2#3{% |
| \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno{#3}}% |
\tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#3\egroup}% |
| } |
} |
| |
|
| % Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents. |
% Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents. |
|
Line 3196 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 3870 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| % We could simplify the code here by writing out an \appendixentry |
% We could simplify the code here by writing out an \appendixentry |
| % command in the toc file for appendices, instead of using \chapentry |
% command in the toc file for appendices, instead of using \chapentry |
| % for both, but it doesn't seem worth it. |
% for both, but it doesn't seem worth it. |
| \setbox0 = \hbox{\shortcontrm \putwordAppendix } |
% |
| \newdimen\shortappendixwidth \shortappendixwidth = \wd0 |
\newdimen\shortappendixwidth |
| |
% |
| \def\shortchaplabel#1{% |
\def\shortchaplabel#1{% |
| |
% Compute width of word "Appendix", may change with language. |
| |
\setbox0 = \hbox{\shortcontrm \putwordAppendix}% |
| |
\shortappendixwidth = \wd0 |
| |
% |
| % We typeset #1 in a box of constant width, regardless of the text of |
% We typeset #1 in a box of constant width, regardless of the text of |
| % #1, so the chapter titles will come out aligned. |
% #1, so the chapter titles will come out aligned. |
| \setbox0 = \hbox{#1}% |
\setbox0 = \hbox{#1}% |
|
Line 3214 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 3892 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| } |
} |
| |
|
| \def\unnumbchapentry#1#2{\dochapentry{#1}{#2}} |
\def\unnumbchapentry#1#2{\dochapentry{#1}{#2}} |
| \def\shortunnumberedentry#1#2{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno{#2}}} |
\def\shortunnumberedentry#1#2{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#2\egroup}} |
| |
|
| % Sections. |
% Sections. |
| \def\secentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2.#3\labelspace#1}{#4}} |
\def\secentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2.#3\labelspace#1}{#4}} |
|
Line 3241 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 3919 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip |
\penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip |
| \begingroup |
\begingroup |
| \chapentryfonts |
\chapentryfonts |
| \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno{#2}}% |
\tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% |
| \endgroup |
\endgroup |
| \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip |
\nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip |
| } |
} |
| |
|
| \def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup |
\def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup |
| \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent |
\secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent |
| \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno{#2}}% |
\tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% |
| \endgroup} |
\endgroup} |
| |
|
| \def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup |
\def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup |
| \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent |
\subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent |
| \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno{#2}}% |
\tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% |
| \endgroup} |
\endgroup} |
| |
|
| \def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup |
\def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup |
| \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent |
\subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent |
| \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno{#2}}% |
\tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% |
| \endgroup} |
\endgroup} |
| |
|
| % Final typesetting of a toc entry; we use the same \entry macro as for |
% Final typesetting of a toc entry; we use the same \entry macro as for |
| % the index entries, but we want to suppress hyphenation here. (We |
% the index entries, but we want to suppress hyphenation here. (We |
| % can't do that in the \entry macro, since index entries might consist |
% can't do that in the \entry macro, since index entries might consist |
| % of hyphenated-identifiers-that-do-not-fit-on-a-line-and-nothing-else.) |
% of hyphenated-identifiers-that-do-not-fit-on-a-line-and-nothing-else.) |
| % |
|
| % \turnoffactive is for the sake of @" used for umlauts. |
|
| \def\tocentry#1#2{\begingroup |
\def\tocentry#1#2{\begingroup |
| \vskip 0pt plus1pt % allow a little stretch for the sake of nice page breaks |
\vskip 0pt plus1pt % allow a little stretch for the sake of nice page breaks |
| \entry{\turnoffactive #1}{\turnoffactive #2}% |
% Do not use \turnoffactive in these arguments. Since the toc is |
| |
% typeset in cmr, so characters such as _ would come out wrong; we |
| |
% have to do the usual translation tricks. |
| |
\entry{#1}{#2}% |
| \endgroup} |
\endgroup} |
| |
|
| % Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title. |
% Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title. |
|
Line 3285 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 3964 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| |
|
| |
|
| \message{environments,} |
\message{environments,} |
| |
% @foo ... @end foo. |
| |
|
| % Since these characters are used in examples, it should be an even number of |
% Since these characters are used in examples, it should be an even number of |
| % \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em. |
% \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em. |
|
Line 3335 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 4015 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| % But \@ or @@ will get a plain tex @ character. |
% But \@ or @@ will get a plain tex @ character. |
| |
|
| \def\tex{\begingroup |
\def\tex{\begingroup |
| \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2 |
\catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2 |
| \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6 |
\catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6 |
| \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=13 \let~=\tie |
\catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=13 \let~=\tie |
| \catcode `\%=14 |
\catcode `\%=14 |
| \catcode 43=12 % plus |
\catcode 43=12 % plus |
| \catcode`\"=12 |
\catcode`\"=12 |
| \catcode`\==12 |
\catcode`\==12 |
| \catcode`\|=12 |
\catcode`\|=12 |
| \catcode`\<=12 |
\catcode`\<=12 |
| \catcode`\>=12 |
\catcode`\>=12 |
| \escapechar=`\\ |
\escapechar=`\\ |
| % |
% |
| \let\,=\ptexcomma |
\let\b=\ptexb |
| \let\~=\ptextilde |
\let\bullet=\ptexbullet |
| \let\{=\ptexlbrace |
\let\c=\ptexc |
| \let\}=\ptexrbrace |
\let\,=\ptexcomma |
| \let\.=\ptexdot |
\let\.=\ptexdot |
| \let\*=\ptexstar |
\let\dots=\ptexdots |
| \let\dots=\ptexdots |
\let\equiv=\ptexequiv |
| \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}} |
\let\!=\ptexexclam |
| \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi} |
\let\i=\ptexi |
| \def\@{@}% |
\let\{=\ptexlbrace |
| \let\bullet=\ptexbullet |
\let\+=\tabalign |
| \let\b=\ptexb \let\c=\ptexc \let\i=\ptexi \let\t=\ptext |
\let\}=\ptexrbrace |
| % |
\let\*=\ptexstar |
| |
\let\t=\ptext |
| |
% |
| |
\def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}% |
| |
\def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}% |
| |
\def\@{@}% |
| \let\Etex=\endgroup} |
\let\Etex=\endgroup} |
| |
|
| % Define @lisp ... @endlisp. |
% Define @lisp ... @endlisp. |
|
Line 3404 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 4089 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| % \nonarrowing is a flag. If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins. |
% \nonarrowing is a flag. If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins. |
| \let\nonarrowing=\relax |
\let\nonarrowing=\relax |
| |
|
| %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% |
% @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around |
| % \cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around argument |
% environment contents. |
| \font\circle=lcircle10 |
\font\circle=lcircle10 |
| \newdimen\circthick |
\newdimen\circthick |
| \newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner |
\newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner |
|
Line 3432 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 4117 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip |
\cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip |
| \advance\cartinner by-\rskip |
\advance\cartinner by-\rskip |
| \cartouter=\hsize |
\cartouter=\hsize |
| \advance\cartouter by 18pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either |
\advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either |
| % side, and for 6pt waste from |
% side, and for 6pt waste from |
| % each corner char |
% each corner char, and rule thickness |
| \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip |
\normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip |
| % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin. |
% Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin. |
| \let\nonarrowing=\comment |
\let\nonarrowing=\comment |
|
Line 3488 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 4173 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| \fi |
\fi |
| } |
} |
| |
|
| % To ending an @example-like environment, we first end the paragraph |
% Define the \E... control sequence only if we are inside the particular |
| % (via \afterenvbreak's vertical glue), and then the group. That way we |
% environment, so the error checking in \end will work. |
| % keep the zero \parskip that the environments set -- \parskip glue |
|
| % will be inserted at the beginning of the next paragraph in the |
|
| % document, after the environment. |
|
| % |
% |
| \def\nonfillfinish{\afterenvbreak\endgroup}% |
% To end an @example-like environment, we first end the paragraph (via |
| |
% \afterenvbreak's vertical glue), and then the group. That way we keep |
| |
% the zero \parskip that the environments set -- \parskip glue will be |
| |
% inserted at the beginning of the next paragraph in the document, after |
| |
% the environment. |
| |
% |
| |
\def\nonfillfinish{\afterenvbreak\endgroup} |
| |
|
| % This macro is |
% @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font. |
| \def\lisp{\begingroup |
\def\lisp{\begingroup |
| \nonfillstart |
\nonfillstart |
| \let\Elisp = \nonfillfinish |
\let\Elisp = \nonfillfinish |
| \tt |
\tt |
| \rawbackslash % have \ input char produce \ char from current font |
\let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special. |
| \gobble |
\gobble % eat return |
| } |
} |
| |
|
| % Define the \E... control sequence only if we are inside the |
% @example: Same as @lisp. |
| % environment, so the error checking in \end will work. |
|
| % |
|
| % We must call \lisp last in the definition, since it reads the |
|
| % return following the @example (or whatever) command. |
|
| % |
|
| \def\example{\begingroup \def\Eexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp} |
\def\example{\begingroup \def\Eexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp} |
| \def\smallexample{\begingroup \def\Esmallexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp} |
|
| \def\smalllisp{\begingroup \def\Esmalllisp{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp} |
|
| |
|
| % @smallexample and @smalllisp. This is not used unless the @smallbook |
% @small... is usually equivalent to the non-small (@smallbook |
| % command is given. Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox. |
% redefines). We must call \example (or whatever) last in the |
| % |
% definition, since it reads the return following the @example (or |
| |
% whatever) command. |
| |
% |
| |
% This actually allows (for example) @end display inside an |
| |
% @smalldisplay. Too bad, but makeinfo will catch the error anyway. |
| |
% |
| |
\def\smalldisplay{\begingroup\def\Esmalldisplay{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\display} |
| |
\def\smallexample{\begingroup\def\Esmallexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp} |
| |
\def\smallformat{\begingroup\def\Esmallformat{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\format} |
| |
\def\smalllisp{\begingroup\def\Esmalllisp{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp} |
| |
|
| |
% Real @smallexample and @smalllisp (when @smallbook): use smaller fonts. |
| |
% Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox. |
| \def\smalllispx{\begingroup |
\def\smalllispx{\begingroup |
| \nonfillstart |
\def\Esmalllisp{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}% |
| \let\Esmalllisp = \nonfillfinish |
\def\Esmallexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}% |
| \let\Esmallexample = \nonfillfinish |
\smallfonts |
| % |
\lisp |
| % Smaller fonts for small examples. |
|
| \indexfonts \tt |
|
| \rawbackslash % make \ output the \ character from the current font (tt) |
|
| \gobble |
|
| } |
} |
| |
|
| % This is @display; same as @lisp except use roman font. |
% @display: same as @lisp except keep current font. |
| % |
% |
| \def\display{\begingroup |
\def\display{\begingroup |
| \nonfillstart |
\nonfillstart |
|
Line 3537 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 4226 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| \gobble |
\gobble |
| } |
} |
| |
|
| % This is @format; same as @display except don't narrow margins. |
% @smalldisplay (when @smallbook): @display plus smaller fonts. |
| |
% |
| |
\def\smalldisplayx{\begingroup |
| |
\def\Esmalldisplay{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}% |
| |
\smallfonts \rm |
| |
\display |
| |
} |
| |
|
| |
% @format: same as @display except don't narrow margins. |
| % |
% |
| \def\format{\begingroup |
\def\format{\begingroup |
| \let\nonarrowing = t |
\let\nonarrowing = t |
|
Line 3546 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 4243 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| \gobble |
\gobble |
| } |
} |
| |
|
| % @flushleft (same as @format) and @flushright. |
% @smallformat (when @smallbook): @format plus smaller fonts. |
| % |
% |
| \def\flushleft{\begingroup |
\def\smallformatx{\begingroup |
| \let\nonarrowing = t |
\def\Esmallformat{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}% |
| \nonfillstart |
\smallfonts \rm |
| \let\Eflushleft = \nonfillfinish |
\format |
| \gobble |
|
| } |
} |
| |
|
| |
% @flushleft (same as @format). |
| |
% |
| |
\def\flushleft{\begingroup \def\Eflushleft{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\format} |
| |
|
| |
% @flushright. |
| |
% |
| \def\flushright{\begingroup |
\def\flushright{\begingroup |
| \let\nonarrowing = t |
\let\nonarrowing = t |
| \nonfillstart |
\nonfillstart |
| \let\Eflushright = \nonfillfinish |
\let\Eflushright = \nonfillfinish |
| \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill |
\advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill |
| \gobble} |
\gobble |
| |
} |
| |
|
| % @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart) |
% @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart) |
| % and narrows the margins. |
% and narrows the margins. |
|
Line 3582 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 4286 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| \fi |
\fi |
| } |
} |
| |
|
| |
|
| \message{defuns,} |
\message{defuns,} |
| % Define formatter for defuns |
% @defun etc. |
| % First, allow user to change definition object font (\df) internally |
|
| |
% Allow user to change definition object font (\df) internally |
| \def\setdeffont #1 {\csname DEF#1\endcsname} |
\def\setdeffont #1 {\csname DEF#1\endcsname} |
| |
|
| \newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in |
\newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in |
|
Line 3618 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 4324 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| |
|
| % Definitions of (, ) and & used in args for functions. |
% Definitions of (, ) and & used in args for functions. |
| % This is the definition of ( outside of all parentheses. |
% This is the definition of ( outside of all parentheses. |
| \gdef\oprm#1 {{\rm\char`\(}#1 \bf \let(=\opnested % |
\gdef\oprm#1 {{\rm\char`\(}#1 \bf \let(=\opnested |
| \global\advance\parencount by 1 } |
\global\advance\parencount by 1 |
| |
} |
| % |
% |
| % This is the definition of ( when already inside a level of parens. |
% This is the definition of ( when already inside a level of parens. |
| \gdef\opnested{\char`\(\global\advance\parencount by 1 } |
\gdef\opnested{\char`\(\global\advance\parencount by 1 } |
| % |
% |
| \gdef\clrm{% Print a paren in roman if it is taking us back to depth of 0. |
\gdef\clrm{% Print a paren in roman if it is taking us back to depth of 0. |
| % also in that case restore the outer-level definition of (. |
% also in that case restore the outer-level definition of (. |
| \ifnum \parencount=1 {\rm \char `\)}\sl \let(=\oprm \else \char `\) \fi |
\ifnum \parencount=1 {\rm \char `\)}\sl \let(=\oprm \else \char `\) \fi |
| \global\advance \parencount by -1 } |
\global\advance \parencount by -1 } |
| % If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards |
% If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards |
| \gdef\amprm#1 {{\rm\}\let(=\oprm \let)=\clrm\ } |
\gdef\amprm#1 {{\rm\}\let(=\oprm \let)=\clrm\ } |
| % |
% |
|
Line 3635 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 4342 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| } % End of definition inside \activeparens |
} % End of definition inside \activeparens |
| %% These parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than the |
%% These parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than the |
| %% contained text. This is especially needed for [ and ] |
%% contained text. This is especially needed for [ and ] |
| \def\opnr{{\sf\char`\(}} \def\clnr{{\sf\char`\)}} \def\ampnr{\&} |
\def\opnr{{\sf\char`\(}\global\advance\parencount by 1 } |
| \def\lbrb{{\bf\char`\[}} \def\rbrb{{\bf\char`\]}} |
\def\clnr{{\sf\char`\)}\global\advance\parencount by -1 } |
| |
\let\ampnr = \& |
| |
\def\lbrb{{\bf\char`\[}} |
| |
\def\rbrb{{\bf\char`\]}} |
| |
|
| |
% Active &'s sneak into the index arguments, so make sure it's defined. |
| |
{ |
| |
\catcode`& = 13 |
| |
\global\let& = \ampnr |
| |
} |
| |
|
| % First, defname, which formats the header line itself. |
% First, defname, which formats the header line itself. |
| % #1 should be the function name. |
% #1 should be the function name. |
|
Line 3647 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 4363 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| % outside the @def... |
% outside the @def... |
| \dimen2=\leftskip |
\dimen2=\leftskip |
| \advance\dimen2 by -\defbodyindent |
\advance\dimen2 by -\defbodyindent |
| \dimen3=\rightskip |
\noindent |
| \advance\dimen3 by -\defbodyindent |
|
| \noindent % |
|
| \setbox0=\hbox{\hskip \deflastargmargin{\rm #2}\hskip \deftypemargin}% |
\setbox0=\hbox{\hskip \deflastargmargin{\rm #2}\hskip \deftypemargin}% |
| \dimen0=\hsize \advance \dimen0 by -\wd0 % compute size for first line |
\dimen0=\hsize \advance \dimen0 by -\wd0 % compute size for first line |
| \dimen1=\hsize \advance \dimen1 by -\defargsindent %size for continuations |
\dimen1=\hsize \advance \dimen1 by -\defargsindent %size for continuations |
| \parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen1 % |
\parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen1 |
| % Now output arg 2 ("Function" or some such) |
% Now output arg 2 ("Function" or some such) |
| % ending at \deftypemargin from the right margin, |
% ending at \deftypemargin from the right margin, |
| % but stuck inside a box of width 0 so it does not interfere with linebreaking |
% but stuck inside a box of width 0 so it does not interfere with linebreaking |
| {% Adjust \hsize to exclude the ambient margins, |
{% Adjust \hsize to exclude the ambient margins, |
| % so that \rightline will obey them. |
% so that \rightline will obey them. |
| \advance \hsize by -\dimen2 \advance \hsize by -\dimen3 |
\advance \hsize by -\dimen2 |
| \rlap{\rightline{{\rm #2}\hskip \deftypemargin}}}% |
\rlap{\rightline{{\rm #2}\hskip -1.25pc }}}% |
| % Make all lines underfull and no complaints: |
% Make all lines underfull and no complaints: |
| \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000 |
\tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000 |
| \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent |
\advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent |
|
Line 3681 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 4395 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}% |
\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}% |
| \def#2{\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit#3}% |
\def#2{\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit#3}% |
| \parindent=0in |
\parindent=0in |
| \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent \advance \rightskip by \defbodyindent |
\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent |
| \exdentamount=\defbodyindent |
\exdentamount=\defbodyindent |
| \begingroup % |
\begingroup % |
| \catcode 61=\active % 61 is `=' |
\catcode 61=\active % 61 is `=' |
| \obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit#3} |
\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit#3} |
| |
|
| \def\defmethparsebody #1#2#3#4 {\begingroup\inENV % |
% #1 is the \E... control sequence to end the definition (which we define). |
| |
% #2 is the \...x control sequence for consecutive fns (which we define). |
| |
% #3 is the control sequence to call to resume processing. |
| |
% #4, delimited by the space, is the class name. |
| |
% |
| |
\def\defmethparsebody#1#2#3#4 {\begingroup\inENV % |
| \medbreak % |
\medbreak % |
| % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies |
% Define the end token that this defining construct specifies |
| % so that it will exit this group. |
% so that it will exit this group. |
| \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}% |
\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}% |
| \def#2##1 {\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##1}}}% |
\def#2##1 {\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##1}}}% |
| \parindent=0in |
\parindent=0in |
| \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent \advance \rightskip by \defbodyindent |
\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent |
| \exdentamount=\defbodyindent |
\exdentamount=\defbodyindent |
| \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#4}}} |
\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#4}}} |
| |
|
| |
% Used for @deftypemethod and @deftypeivar. |
| |
% #1 is the \E... control sequence to end the definition (which we define). |
| |
% #2 is the \...x control sequence for consecutive fns (which we define). |
| |
% #3 is the control sequence to call to resume processing. |
| |
% #4, delimited by a space, is the class name. |
| |
% #5 is the method's return type. |
| |
% |
| |
\def\deftypemethparsebody#1#2#3#4 #5 {\begingroup\inENV |
| |
\medbreak |
| |
\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}% |
| |
\def#2##1 ##2 {\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##1}{##2}}}% |
| |
\parindent=0in |
| |
\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent |
| |
\exdentamount=\defbodyindent |
| |
\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#4}{#5}}} |
| |
|
| |
% Used for @deftypeop. The change from \deftypemethparsebody is an |
| |
% extra argument at the beginning which is the `category', instead of it |
| |
% being the hardwired string `Method' or `Instance Variable'. We have |
| |
% to account for this both in the \...x definition and in parsing the |
| |
% input at hand. Thus also need a control sequence (passed as #5) for |
| |
% the \E... definition to assign the category name to. |
| |
% |
| |
\def\deftypeopparsebody#1#2#3#4#5 #6 {\begingroup\inENV |
| |
\medbreak |
| |
\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}% |
| |
\def#2##1 ##2 ##3 {% |
| |
\def#4{##1}% |
| |
\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##2}{##3}}}% |
| |
\parindent=0in |
| |
\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent |
| |
\exdentamount=\defbodyindent |
| |
\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#5}{#6}}} |
| |
|
| \def\defopparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {\begingroup\inENV % |
\def\defopparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {\begingroup\inENV % |
| \medbreak % |
\medbreak % |
| % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies |
% Define the end token that this defining construct specifies |
|
Line 3706 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 4459 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| \def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}% |
\def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}% |
| \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##2}}}% |
\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##2}}}% |
| \parindent=0in |
\parindent=0in |
| \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent \advance \rightskip by \defbodyindent |
\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent |
| \exdentamount=\defbodyindent |
\exdentamount=\defbodyindent |
| \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#5}}} |
\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#5}}} |
| |
|
|
Line 3721 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 4474 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}% |
\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}% |
| \def#2{\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit#3}% |
\def#2{\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit#3}% |
| \parindent=0in |
\parindent=0in |
| \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent \advance \rightskip by \defbodyindent |
\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent |
| \exdentamount=\defbodyindent |
\exdentamount=\defbodyindent |
| \begingroup % |
\begingroup % |
| \catcode 61=\active % |
\catcode 61=\active % |
|
Line 3729 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 4482 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| |
|
| % This is used for \def{tp,vr}parsebody. It could probably be used for |
% This is used for \def{tp,vr}parsebody. It could probably be used for |
| % some of the others, too, with some judicious conditionals. |
% some of the others, too, with some judicious conditionals. |
| % |
% |
| \def\parsebodycommon#1#2#3{% |
\def\parsebodycommon#1#2#3{% |
| \begingroup\inENV % |
\begingroup\inENV % |
| \medbreak % |
\medbreak % |
|
Line 3738 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 4491 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}% |
\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}% |
| \def#2##1 {\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{##1}}}% |
\def#2##1 {\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{##1}}}% |
| \parindent=0in |
\parindent=0in |
| \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent \advance \rightskip by \defbodyindent |
\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent |
| \exdentamount=\defbodyindent |
\exdentamount=\defbodyindent |
| \begingroup\obeylines |
\begingroup\obeylines |
| } |
} |
|
Line 3763 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 4516 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| } |
} |
| |
|
| % Fine, but then we have to eventually remove the \empty *and* the |
% Fine, but then we have to eventually remove the \empty *and* the |
| % braces (if any). That's what this does, putting the result in \tptemp. |
% braces (if any). That's what this does. |
| % |
% |
| \def\removeemptybraces\empty#1\relax{\def\tptemp{#1}}% |
\def\removeemptybraces\empty#1\relax{#1} |
| |
|
| % After \spacesplit has done its work, this is called -- #1 is the final |
% After \spacesplit has done its work, this is called -- #1 is the final |
| % thing to call, #2 the type name (which starts with \empty), and #3 |
% thing to call, #2 the type name (which starts with \empty), and #3 |
| % (which might be empty) the arguments. |
% (which might be empty) the arguments. |
| % |
% |
| \def\parsetpheaderline#1#2#3{% |
\def\parsetpheaderline#1#2#3{% |
| \removeemptybraces#2\relax |
#1{\removeemptybraces#2\relax}{#3}% |
| #1{\tptemp}{#3}% |
|
| }% |
}% |
| |
|
| \def\defopvarparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {\begingroup\inENV % |
\def\defopvarparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {\begingroup\inENV % |
|
Line 3784 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 4536 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| \def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}% |
\def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}% |
| \begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{##2}}}% |
\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{##2}}}% |
| \parindent=0in |
\parindent=0in |
| \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent \advance \rightskip by \defbodyindent |
\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent |
| \exdentamount=\defbodyindent |
\exdentamount=\defbodyindent |
| \begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{#5}}} |
\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{#5}}} |
| |
|
|
Line 3808 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 4560 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| % First, define the processing that is wanted for arguments of \defun |
% First, define the processing that is wanted for arguments of \defun |
| % Use this to expand the args and terminate the paragraph they make up |
% Use this to expand the args and terminate the paragraph they make up |
| |
|
| \def\defunargs #1{\functionparens \sl |
\def\defunargs#1{\functionparens \sl |
| % Expand, preventing hyphenation at `-' chars. |
% Expand, preventing hyphenation at `-' chars. |
| % Note that groups don't affect changes in \hyphenchar. |
% Note that groups don't affect changes in \hyphenchar. |
| \hyphenchar\tensl=0 |
% Set the font temporarily and use \font in case \setfont made \tensl a macro. |
| |
{\tensl\hyphenchar\font=0}% |
| #1% |
#1% |
| \hyphenchar\tensl=45 |
{\tensl\hyphenchar\font=45}% |
| \ifnum\parencount=0 \else \errmessage{unbalanced parens in @def arguments}\fi% |
\ifnum\parencount=0 \else \errmessage{Unbalanced parentheses in @def}\fi% |
| \interlinepenalty=10000 |
\interlinepenalty=10000 |
| \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil |
\advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil |
| \endgraf\penalty 10000\vskip -\parskip\penalty 10000% |
\endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak |
| } |
} |
| |
|
| \def\deftypefunargs #1{% |
\def\deftypefunargs #1{% |
|
Line 3828 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 4581 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| \tclose{#1}% avoid \code because of side effects on active chars |
\tclose{#1}% avoid \code because of side effects on active chars |
| \interlinepenalty=10000 |
\interlinepenalty=10000 |
| \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil |
\advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil |
| \endgraf\penalty 10000\vskip -\parskip\penalty 10000% |
\endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak |
| } |
} |
| |
|
| % Do complete processing of one @defun or @defunx line already parsed. |
% Do complete processing of one @defun or @defunx line already parsed. |
|
Line 3847 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 4600 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| \def\defun{\defparsebody\Edefun\defunx\defunheader} |
\def\defun{\defparsebody\Edefun\defunx\defunheader} |
| |
|
| \def\defunheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index |
\def\defunheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index |
| \begingroup\defname {#1}{Function}% |
\begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDeffunc}% |
| \defunargs {#2}\endgroup % |
\defunargs {#2}\endgroup % |
| \catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody |
\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody |
| } |
} |
|
Line 3861 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 4614 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| % #1 is the data type, #2 the name, #3 the args. |
% #1 is the data type, #2 the name, #3 the args. |
| \def\deftypefunheaderx #1#2 #3\relax{% |
\def\deftypefunheaderx #1#2 #3\relax{% |
| \doind {fn}{\code{#2}}% Make entry in function index |
\doind {fn}{\code{#2}}% Make entry in function index |
| \begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#1\relax$$$#2}{Function}% |
\begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#1\relax$$$#2}{\putwordDeftypefun}% |
| \deftypefunargs {#3}\endgroup % |
\deftypefunargs {#3}\endgroup % |
| \catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody |
\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody |
| } |
} |
|
Line 3892 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 4645 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| \def\defmac{\defparsebody\Edefmac\defmacx\defmacheader} |
\def\defmac{\defparsebody\Edefmac\defmacx\defmacheader} |
| |
|
| \def\defmacheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index |
\def\defmacheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index |
| \begingroup\defname {#1}{Macro}% |
\begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefmac}% |
| \defunargs {#2}\endgroup % |
\defunargs {#2}\endgroup % |
| \catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody |
\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody |
| } |
} |
|
Line 3902 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 4655 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| \def\defspec{\defparsebody\Edefspec\defspecx\defspecheader} |
\def\defspec{\defparsebody\Edefspec\defspecx\defspecheader} |
| |
|
| \def\defspecheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index |
\def\defspecheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index |
| \begingroup\defname {#1}{Special Form}% |
\begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefspec}% |
| \defunargs {#2}\endgroup % |
\defunargs {#2}\endgroup % |
| \catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody |
\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody |
| } |
} |
| |
|
| % This definition is run if you use @defunx |
% @defop CATEGORY CLASS OPERATION ARG... |
| % anywhere other than immediately after a @defun or @defunx. |
% |
| |
|
| \def\deffnx #1 {\errmessage{@deffnx in invalid context}} |
|
| \def\defunx #1 {\errmessage{@defunx in invalid context}} |
|
| \def\defmacx #1 {\errmessage{@defmacx in invalid context}} |
|
| \def\defspecx #1 {\errmessage{@defspecx in invalid context}} |
|
| \def\deftypefnx #1 {\errmessage{@deftypefnx in invalid context}} |
|
| \def\deftypeunx #1 {\errmessage{@deftypeunx in invalid context}} |
|
| |
|
| % @defmethod, and so on |
|
| |
|
| % @defop {Funny Method} foo-class frobnicate argument |
|
| |
|
| \def\defop #1 {\def\defoptype{#1}% |
\def\defop #1 {\def\defoptype{#1}% |
| \defopparsebody\Edefop\defopx\defopheader\defoptype} |
\defopparsebody\Edefop\defopx\defopheader\defoptype} |
| |
% |
| \def\defopheader #1#2#3{% |
\def\defopheader#1#2#3{% |
| \dosubind {fn}{\code{#2}}{on #1}% Make entry in function index |
\dosubind {fn}{\code{#2}}{\putwordon\ #1}% Make entry in function index |
| \begingroup\defname {#2}{\defoptype{} on #1}% |
\begingroup\defname {#2}{\defoptype\ \putwordon\ #1}% |
| \defunargs {#3}\endgroup % |
\defunargs {#3}\endgroup % |
| } |
} |
| |
|
| % @defmethod == @defop Method |
% @deftypeop CATEGORY CLASS TYPE OPERATION ARG... |
| |
% |
| |
\def\deftypeop #1 {\def\deftypeopcategory{#1}% |
| |
\deftypeopparsebody\Edeftypeop\deftypeopx\deftypeopheader |
| |
\deftypeopcategory} |
| |
% |
| |
% #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the operation name, #4 the args. |
| |
\def\deftypeopheader#1#2#3#4{% |
| |
\dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index |
| |
\begingroup |
| |
\defname{\defheaderxcond#2\relax$$$#3} |
| |
{\deftypeopcategory\ \putwordon\ \code{#1}}% |
| |
\deftypefunargs{#4}% |
| |
\endgroup |
| |
} |
| |
|
| \def\defmethod{\defmethparsebody\Edefmethod\defmethodx\defmethodheader} |
% @deftypemethod CLASS TYPE METHOD ARG... |
| |
% |
| |
\def\deftypemethod{% |
| |
\deftypemethparsebody\Edeftypemethod\deftypemethodx\deftypemethodheader} |
| |
% |
| |
% #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the method name, #4 the args. |
| |
\def\deftypemethodheader#1#2#3#4{% |
| |
\dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index |
| |
\begingroup |
| |
\defname{\defheaderxcond#2\relax$$$#3}{\putwordMethodon\ \code{#1}}% |
| |
\deftypefunargs{#4}% |
| |
\endgroup |
| |
} |
| |
|
| \def\defmethodheader #1#2#3{% |
% @deftypeivar CLASS TYPE VARNAME |
| \dosubind {fn}{\code{#2}}{on #1}% entry in function index |
% |
| \begingroup\defname {#2}{Method on #1}% |
\def\deftypeivar{% |
| \defunargs {#3}\endgroup % |
\deftypemethparsebody\Edeftypeivar\deftypeivarx\deftypeivarheader} |
| |
% |
| |
% #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the variable name. |
| |
\def\deftypeivarheader#1#2#3{% |
| |
\dosubind{vr}{\code{#3}}{\putwordof\ \code{#1}}% entry in variable index |
| |
\begingroup |
| |
\defname{#3}{\putwordInstanceVariableof\ \code{#1}}% |
| |
\defvarargs{#3}% |
| |
\endgroup |
| |
} |
| |
|
| |
% @defmethod == @defop Method |
| |
% |
| |
\def\defmethod{\defmethparsebody\Edefmethod\defmethodx\defmethodheader} |
| |
% |
| |
% #1 is the class name, #2 the method name, #3 the args. |
| |
\def\defmethodheader#1#2#3{% |
| |
\dosubind{fn}{\code{#2}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index |
| |
\begingroup |
| |
\defname{#2}{\putwordMethodon\ \code{#1}}% |
| |
\defunargs{#3}% |
| |
\endgroup |
| } |
} |
| |
|
| % @defcv {Class Option} foo-class foo-flag |
% @defcv {Class Option} foo-class foo-flag |
|
Line 3946 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 4734 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| \defopvarparsebody\Edefcv\defcvx\defcvarheader\defcvtype} |
\defopvarparsebody\Edefcv\defcvx\defcvarheader\defcvtype} |
| |
|
| \def\defcvarheader #1#2#3{% |
\def\defcvarheader #1#2#3{% |
| \dosubind {vr}{\code{#2}}{of #1}% Make entry in var index |
\dosubind {vr}{\code{#2}}{\putwordof\ #1}% Make entry in var index |
| \begingroup\defname {#2}{\defcvtype{} of #1}% |
\begingroup\defname {#2}{\defcvtype\ \putwordof\ #1}% |
| \defvarargs {#3}\endgroup % |
\defvarargs {#3}\endgroup % |
| } |
} |
| |
|
| % @defivar == @defcv {Instance Variable} |
% @defivar CLASS VARNAME == @defcv {Instance Variable} CLASS VARNAME |
| |
% |
| \def\defivar{\defvrparsebody\Edefivar\defivarx\defivarheader} |
\def\defivar{\defvrparsebody\Edefivar\defivarx\defivarheader} |
| |
% |
| \def\defivarheader #1#2#3{% |
\def\defivarheader#1#2#3{% |
| \dosubind {vr}{\code{#2}}{of #1}% Make entry in var index |
\dosubind {vr}{\code{#2}}{\putwordof\ #1}% entry in var index |
| \begingroup\defname {#2}{Instance Variable of #1}% |
\begingroup |
| \defvarargs {#3}\endgroup % |
\defname{#2}{\putwordInstanceVariableof\ #1}% |
| |
\defvarargs{#3}% |
| |
\endgroup |
| } |
} |
| |
|
| % These definitions are run if you use @defmethodx, etc., |
% @defvar |
| % anywhere other than immediately after a @defmethod, etc. |
|
| |
|
| \def\defopx #1 {\errmessage{@defopx in invalid context}} |
|
| \def\defmethodx #1 {\errmessage{@defmethodx in invalid context}} |
|
| \def\defcvx #1 {\errmessage{@defcvx in invalid context}} |
|
| \def\defivarx #1 {\errmessage{@defivarx in invalid context}} |
|
| |
|
| % Now @defvar |
|
| |
|
| % First, define the processing that is wanted for arguments of @defvar. |
% First, define the processing that is wanted for arguments of @defvar. |
| % This is actually simple: just print them in roman. |
% This is actually simple: just print them in roman. |
| % This must expand the args and terminate the paragraph they make up |
% This must expand the args and terminate the paragraph they make up |
| \def\defvarargs #1{\normalparens #1% |
\def\defvarargs #1{\normalparens #1% |
| \interlinepenalty=10000 |
\interlinepenalty=10000 |
| \endgraf\penalty 10000\vskip -\parskip\penalty 10000} |
\endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak} |
| |
|
| % @defvr Counter foo-count |
% @defvr Counter foo-count |
| |
|
|
Line 3990 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 4771 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| \def\defvar{\defvarparsebody\Edefvar\defvarx\defvarheader} |
\def\defvar{\defvarparsebody\Edefvar\defvarx\defvarheader} |
| |
|
| \def\defvarheader #1#2{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in var index |
\def\defvarheader #1#2{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in var index |
| \begingroup\defname {#1}{Variable}% |
\begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefvar}% |
| \defvarargs {#2}\endgroup % |
\defvarargs {#2}\endgroup % |
| } |
} |
| |
|
|
Line 3999 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 4780 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| \def\defopt{\defvarparsebody\Edefopt\defoptx\defoptheader} |
\def\defopt{\defvarparsebody\Edefopt\defoptx\defoptheader} |
| |
|
| \def\defoptheader #1#2{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in var index |
\def\defoptheader #1#2{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in var index |
| \begingroup\defname {#1}{User Option}% |
\begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefopt}% |
| \defvarargs {#2}\endgroup % |
\defvarargs {#2}\endgroup % |
| } |
} |
| |
|
|
Line 4007 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 4788 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| |
|
| \def\deftypevar{\defvarparsebody\Edeftypevar\deftypevarx\deftypevarheader} |
\def\deftypevar{\defvarparsebody\Edeftypevar\deftypevarx\deftypevarheader} |
| |
|
| % #1 is the data type. #2 is the name. |
% #1 is the data type. #2 is the name, perhaps followed by text that |
| |
% is actually part of the data type, which should not be put into the index. |
| \def\deftypevarheader #1#2{% |
\def\deftypevarheader #1#2{% |
| \doind {vr}{\code{#2}}% Make entry in variables index |
\dovarind#2 \relax% Make entry in variables index |
| \begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#1\relax$$$#2}{Variable}% |
\begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#1\relax$$$#2}{\putwordDeftypevar}% |
| \interlinepenalty=10000 |
\interlinepenalty=10000 |
| \endgraf\penalty 10000\vskip -\parskip\penalty 10000 |
\endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak |
| \endgroup} |
\endgroup} |
| |
\def\dovarind#1 #2\relax{\doind{vr}{\code{#1}}} |
| |
|
| % @deftypevr {Global Flag} int enable |
% @deftypevr {Global Flag} int enable |
| |
|
| \def\deftypevr{\defvrparsebody\Edeftypevr\deftypevrx\deftypevrheader} |
\def\deftypevr{\defvrparsebody\Edeftypevr\deftypevrx\deftypevrheader} |
| |
|
| \def\deftypevrheader #1#2#3{\doind {vr}{\code{#3}}% |
\def\deftypevrheader #1#2#3{\dovarind#3 \relax% |
| \begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#2\relax$$$#3}{#1} |
\begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#2\relax$$$#3}{#1} |
| \interlinepenalty=10000 |
\interlinepenalty=10000 |
| \endgraf\penalty 10000\vskip -\parskip\penalty 10000 |
\endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak |
| \endgroup} |
\endgroup} |
| |
|
| % This definition is run if you use @defvarx |
|
| % anywhere other than immediately after a @defvar or @defvarx. |
|
| |
|
| \def\defvrx #1 {\errmessage{@defvrx in invalid context}} |
|
| \def\defvarx #1 {\errmessage{@defvarx in invalid context}} |
|
| \def\defoptx #1 {\errmessage{@defoptx in invalid context}} |
|
| \def\deftypevarx #1 {\errmessage{@deftypevarx in invalid context}} |
|
| \def\deftypevrx #1 {\errmessage{@deftypevrx in invalid context}} |
|
| |
|
| % Now define @deftp |
% Now define @deftp |
| % Args are printed in bold, a slight difference from @defvar. |
% Args are printed in bold, a slight difference from @defvar. |
| |
|
|
Line 4046 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 4820 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| \def\deftpheader #1#2#3{\doind {tp}{\code{#2}}% |
\def\deftpheader #1#2#3{\doind {tp}{\code{#2}}% |
| \begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\deftpargs{#3}\endgroup} |
\begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\deftpargs{#3}\endgroup} |
| |
|
| % This definition is run if you use @deftpx, etc |
% These definitions are used if you use @defunx (etc.) |
| % anywhere other than immediately after a @deftp, etc. |
% anywhere other than immediately after a @defun or @defunx. |
| |
% |
| |
\def\defcvx#1 {\errmessage{@defcvx in invalid context}} |
| |
\def\deffnx#1 {\errmessage{@deffnx in invalid context}} |
| |
\def\defivarx#1 {\errmessage{@defivarx in invalid context}} |
| |
\def\defmacx#1 {\errmessage{@defmacx in invalid context}} |
| |
\def\defmethodx#1 {\errmessage{@defmethodx in invalid context}} |
| |
\def\defoptx #1 {\errmessage{@defoptx in invalid context}} |
| |
\def\defopx#1 {\errmessage{@defopx in invalid context}} |
| |
\def\defspecx#1 {\errmessage{@defspecx in invalid context}} |
| |
\def\deftpx#1 {\errmessage{@deftpx in invalid context}} |
| |
\def\deftypefnx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypefnx in invalid context}} |
| |
\def\deftypefunx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypefunx in invalid context}} |
| |
\def\deftypeivarx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypeivarx in invalid context}} |
| |
\def\deftypemethodx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypemethodx in invalid context}} |
| |
\def\deftypeopx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypeopx in invalid context}} |
| |
\def\deftypevarx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypevarx in invalid context}} |
| |
\def\deftypevrx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypevrx in invalid context}} |
| |
\def\defunx#1 {\errmessage{@defunx in invalid context}} |
| |
\def\defvarx#1 {\errmessage{@defvarx in invalid context}} |
| |
\def\defvrx#1 {\errmessage{@defvrx in invalid context}} |
| |
|
| |
|
| |
\message{macros,} |
| |
% @macro. |
| |
|
| |
% To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens, |
| |
% which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX. |
| |
\ifx\eTeXversion\undefined |
| |
\newwrite\macscribble |
| |
\def\scanmacro#1{% |
| |
\begingroup \newlinechar`\^^M |
| |
% Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex |
| |
\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=12 \escapechar=`\@ |
| |
% Append \endinput to make sure that TeX does not see the ending newline. |
| |
\toks0={#1\endinput}% |
| |
\immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp |
| |
\immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}% |
| |
\immediate\closeout\macscribble |
| |
\let\xeatspaces\eatspaces |
| |
\input \jobname.tmp |
| |
\endgroup |
| |
} |
| |
\else |
| |
\def\scanmacro#1{% |
| |
\begingroup \newlinechar`\^^M |
| |
% Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex |
| |
\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=12 \escapechar=`\@ |
| |
\let\xeatspaces\eatspaces\scantokens{#1\endinput}\endgroup} |
| |
\fi |
| |
|
| |
\newcount\paramno % Count of parameters |
| |
\newtoks\macname % Macro name |
| |
\newif\ifrecursive % Is it recursive? |
| |
\def\macrolist{} % List of all defined macros in the form |
| |
% \do\macro1\do\macro2... |
| |
|
| |
% Utility routines. |
| |
% Thisdoes \let #1 = #2, except with \csnames. |
| |
\def\cslet#1#2{% |
| |
\expandafter\expandafter |
| |
\expandafter\let |
| |
\expandafter\expandafter |
| |
\csname#1\endcsname |
| |
\csname#2\endcsname} |
| |
|
| \def\deftpx #1 {\errmessage{@deftpx in invalid context}} |
% Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string. |
| |
% Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN). |
| |
{\catcode`\@=11 |
| |
\gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }} |
| |
\gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@} |
| |
\gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @} |
| |
\def\unbrace#1{#1} |
| |
\unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1} |
| |
} |
| |
|
| |
% Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string. |
| |
{\catcode`\^^M=12\catcode`\Q=3% |
| |
\gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}% |
| |
\gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}% |
| |
\gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}% |
| |
} |
| |
|
| |
% Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where |
| |
% all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active |
| |
% (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \. |
| |
|
| |
% It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is |
| |
% done by making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro |
| |
% body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro. |
| |
|
| |
\def\macrobodyctxt{% |
| |
\catcode`\~=12 |
| |
\catcode`\^=12 |
| |
\catcode`\_=12 |
| |
\catcode`\|=12 |
| |
\catcode`\<=12 |
| |
\catcode`\>=12 |
| |
\catcode`\+=12 |
| |
\catcode`\{=12 |
| |
\catcode`\}=12 |
| |
\catcode`\@=12 |
| |
\catcode`\^^M=12 |
| |
\usembodybackslash} |
| |
|
| |
\def\macroargctxt{% |
| |
\catcode`\~=12 |
| |
\catcode`\^=12 |
| |
\catcode`\_=12 |
| |
\catcode`\|=12 |
| |
\catcode`\<=12 |
| |
\catcode`\>=12 |
| |
\catcode`\+=12 |
| |
\catcode`\@=12 |
| |
\catcode`\\=12} |
| |
|
| |
% \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies. |
| |
% It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N |
| |
% where N is the macro parameter number. |
| |
% We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so |
| |
% \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash. |
| |
|
| |
{\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active |
| |
@gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash} |
| |
@gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname} |
| |
} |
| |
\expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash} |
| |
|
| |
\def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx} |
| |
\def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx} |
| |
|
| |
\def\macroxxx#1{% |
| |
\getargs{#1}% now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist |
| |
\ifx\argl\empty % no arguments |
| |
\paramno=0% |
| |
\else |
| |
\expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;% |
| |
\fi |
| |
\if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname |
| |
\message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}% |
| |
\else |
| |
\expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax |
| |
\else \errmessage{The name \the\macname\space is reserved}\fi |
| |
\global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}% |
| |
\global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1% |
| |
% Add the macroname to \macrolist |
| |
\toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\do}% |
| |
\xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0 |
| |
\expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname\endcsname}% |
| |
\fi |
| |
\begingroup \macrobodyctxt |
| |
\ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody |
| |
\else \expandafter\parsemacbody |
| |
\fi} |
| |
|
| |
\def\unmacro{\parsearg\unmacroxxx} |
| |
\def\unmacroxxx#1{% |
| |
\if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname |
| |
\global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}% |
| |
\global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0% |
| |
% Remove the macro name from \macrolist |
| |
\begingroup |
| |
\edef\tempa{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname}% |
| |
\def\do##1{% |
| |
\def\tempb{##1}% |
| |
\ifx\tempa\tempb |
| |
% remove this |
| |
\else |
| |
\toks0 = \expandafter{\newmacrolist\do}% |
| |
\edef\newmacrolist{\the\toks0\expandafter\noexpand\tempa}% |
| |
\fi}% |
| |
\def\newmacrolist{}% |
| |
% Execute macro list to define \newmacrolist |
| |
\macrolist |
| |
\global\let\macrolist\newmacrolist |
| |
\endgroup |
| |
\else |
| |
\errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}% |
| |
\fi |
| |
} |
| |
|
| |
% This makes use of the obscure feature that if the last token of a |
| |
% <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by |
| |
% an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed. |
| |
\def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}} |
| |
\def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs} |
| |
\def\getmacname #1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}} |
| |
\def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}} |
| |
|
| |
% Parse the optional {params} list. Set up \paramno and \paramlist |
| |
% so \defmacro knows what to do. Define \macarg.blah for each blah |
| |
% in the params list, to be ##N where N is the position in that list. |
| |
% That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above). |
| |
|
| |
% We need to get `macro parameter char #' into several definitions. |
| |
% The technique used is stolen from LaTeX: let \hash be something |
| |
% unexpandable, insert that wherever you need a #, and then redefine |
| |
% it to # just before using the token list produced. |
| |
% |
| |
% The same technique is used to protect \eatspaces till just before |
| |
% the macro is used. |
| |
|
| |
\def\parsemargdef#1;{\paramno=0\def\paramlist{}% |
| |
\let\hash\relax\let\xeatspaces\relax\parsemargdefxxx#1,;,} |
| |
\def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{% |
| |
\if#1;\let\next=\relax |
| |
\else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx |
| |
\advance\paramno by 1% |
| |
\expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname |
| |
{\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}% |
| |
\edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}% |
| |
\fi\next} |
| |
|
| |
% These two commands read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies. |
| |
% (They're different since rec and nonrec macros end differently.) |
| |
|
| |
\long\def\parsemacbody#1@end macro% |
| |
{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}% |
| |
\long\def\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro% |
| |
{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}% |
| |
|
| |
% This defines the macro itself. There are six cases: recursive and |
| |
% nonrecursive macros of zero, one, and many arguments. |
| |
% Much magic with \expandafter here. |
| |
% \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file |
| |
% they're defined in; @include reads the file inside a group. |
| |
\def\defmacro{% |
| |
\let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars |
| |
\ifrecursive |
| |
\ifcase\paramno |
| |
% 0 |
| |
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% |
| |
\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% |
| |
\or % 1 |
| |
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% |
| |
\bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt |
| |
\noexpand\braceorline |
| |
\expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}% |
| |
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{% |
| |
\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% |
| |
\else % many |
| |
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% |
| |
\bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt |
| |
\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}% |
| |
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{% |
| |
\expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}% |
| |
\expandafter\expandafter |
| |
\expandafter\xdef |
| |
\expandafter\expandafter |
| |
\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname |
| |
\paramlist{\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% |
| |
\fi |
| |
\else |
| |
\ifcase\paramno |
| |
% 0 |
| |
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% |
| |
\noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% |
| |
\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% |
| |
\or % 1 |
| |
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% |
| |
\bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt |
| |
\noexpand\braceorline |
| |
\expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}% |
| |
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{% |
| |
\egroup |
| |
\noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% |
| |
\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% |
| |
\else % many |
| |
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% |
| |
\bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt |
| |
\expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}% |
| |
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{% |
| |
\expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}% |
| |
\expandafter\expandafter |
| |
\expandafter\xdef |
| |
\expandafter\expandafter |
| |
\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname |
| |
\paramlist{% |
| |
\egroup |
| |
\noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% |
| |
\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% |
| |
\fi |
| |
\fi} |
| |
|
| |
\def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}} |
| |
|
| \message{cross reference,} |
% \braceorline decides whether the next nonwhitespace character is a |
| % Define cross-reference macros |
% {. If so it reads up to the closing }, if not, it reads the whole |
| \newwrite \auxfile |
% line. Whatever was read is then fed to the next control sequence |
| |
% as an argument (by \parsebrace or \parsearg) |
| |
\def\braceorline#1{\let\next=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx} |
| |
\def\braceorlinexxx{% |
| |
\ifx\nchar\bgroup\else |
| |
\expandafter\parsearg |
| |
\fi \next} |
| |
|
| |
% We mant to disable all macros during \shipout so that they are not |
| |
% expanded by \write. |
| |
\def\turnoffmacros{\begingroup \def\do##1{\let\noexpand##1=\relax}% |
| |
\edef\next{\macrolist}\expandafter\endgroup\next} |
| |
|
| |
|
| |
% @alias. |
| |
% We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal |
| |
% sign. Just make them active and then expand them all to nothing. |
| |
\def\alias{\begingroup\obeyspaces\parsearg\aliasxxx} |
| |
\def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax} |
| |
\def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{\ignoreactivespaces |
| |
\edef\next{\global\let\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname=% |
| |
\expandafter\noexpand\csname#2\endcsname}% |
| |
\expandafter\endgroup\next} |
| |
|
| \newif\ifhavexrefs % True if xref values are known. |
|
| |
\message{cross references,} |
| |
% @xref etc. |
| |
|
| |
\newwrite\auxfile |
| |
|
| |
\newif\ifhavexrefs % True if xref values are known. |
| \newif\ifwarnedxrefs % True if we warned once that they aren't known. |
\newif\ifwarnedxrefs % True if we warned once that they aren't known. |
| |
|
| % @inforef is simple. |
% @inforef is relatively simple. |
| \def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**} |
\def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**} |
| \def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{\putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}}, |
\def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{\putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}}, |
| node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}} |
node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}} |
| |
|
| % \setref{foo} defines a cross-reference point named foo. |
% @node's job is to define \lastnode. |
| |
\def\node{\ENVcheck\parsearg\nodezzz} |
| |
\def\nodezzz#1{\nodexxx [#1,]} |
| |
\def\nodexxx[#1,#2]{\gdef\lastnode{#1}} |
| |
\let\nwnode=\node |
| |
\let\lastnode=\relax |
| |
|
| |
% The sectioning commands (@chapter, etc.) call these. |
| |
\def\donoderef{% |
| |
\ifx\lastnode\relax\else |
| |
\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}% |
| |
{Ysectionnumberandtype}% |
| |
\global\let\lastnode=\relax |
| |
\fi |
| |
} |
| |
\def\unnumbnoderef{% |
| |
\ifx\lastnode\relax\else |
| |
\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}{Ynothing}% |
| |
\global\let\lastnode=\relax |
| |
\fi |
| |
} |
| |
\def\appendixnoderef{% |
| |
\ifx\lastnode\relax\else |
| |
\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}% |
| |
{Yappendixletterandtype}% |
| |
\global\let\lastnode=\relax |
| |
\fi |
| |
} |
| |
|
| |
|
| \def\setref#1{% |
% @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point. |
| \dosetq{#1-title}{Ytitle}% |
% |
| \dosetq{#1-pg}{Ypagenumber}% |
\newcount\savesfregister |
| \dosetq{#1-snt}{Ysectionnumberandtype}} |
\gdef\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi} |
| |
\gdef\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi} |
| \def\unnumbsetref#1{% |
\gdef\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces} |
| \dosetq{#1-title}{Ytitle}% |
|
| \dosetq{#1-pg}{Ypagenumber}% |
% \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME, namely |
| \dosetq{#1-snt}{Ynothing}} |
% NAME-title, NAME-pg, and NAME-SNT. Called from \foonoderef. We have |
| |
% to set \indexdummies so commands such as @code in a section title |
| \def\appendixsetref#1{% |
% aren't expanded. It would be nicer not to expand the titles in the |
| \dosetq{#1-title}{Ytitle}% |
% first place, but there's so many layers that that is hard to do. |
| \dosetq{#1-pg}{Ypagenumber}% |
% |
| \dosetq{#1-snt}{Yappendixletterandtype}} |
\def\setref#1#2{{% |
| |
\indexdummies |
| % \xref, \pxref, and \ref generate cross-references to specified points. |
\pdfmkdest{#1}% |
| % For \xrefX, #1 is the node name, #2 the name of the Info |
\dosetq{#1-title}{Ytitle}% |
| % cross-reference, #3 the printed node name, #4 the name of the Info |
\dosetq{#1-pg}{Ypagenumber}% |
| % file, #5 the name of the printed manual. All but the node name can be |
\dosetq{#1-snt}{#2}% |
| % omitted. |
}} |
| |
|
| |
% @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references. For \xrefX, #1 is |
| |
% the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed |
| |
% node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed |
| |
% manual. All but the node name can be omitted. |
| % |
% |
| \def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} |
\def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} |
| \def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} |
\def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} |
| \def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} |
\def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} |
| \def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup |
\def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup |
| |
\unsepspaces |
| \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}% |
\def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}% |
| \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #3}% |
\def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #3}% |
| \setbox1=\hbox{\printedmanual}% |
\setbox1=\hbox{\printedmanual}% |
|
Line 4103 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 5220 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| \else |
\else |
| % Use the actual chapter/section title appear inside |
% Use the actual chapter/section title appear inside |
| % the square brackets. Use the real section title if we have it. |
% the square brackets. Use the real section title if we have it. |
| \ifdim \wd1>0pt% |
\ifdim \wd1 > 0pt |
| % It is in another manual, so we don't have it. |
% It is in another manual, so we don't have it. |
| \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}% |
\def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}% |
| \else |
\else |
|
Line 4124 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 5241 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, this |
% are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, this |
| % is a loss. Therefore, we give the text of the node name again, so it |
% is a loss. Therefore, we give the text of the node name again, so it |
| % is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time. |
% is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time. |
| |
\ifpdf |
| |
\leavevmode |
| |
\getfilename{#4}% |
| |
\ifnum\filenamelength>0 |
| |
\startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% |
| |
goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{#1@}% |
| |
\else |
| |
\startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% |
| |
goto name{#1@}% |
| |
\fi |
| |
\linkcolor |
| |
\fi |
| |
% |
| \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt |
\ifdim \wd1 > 0pt |
| \putwordsection{} ``\printednodename'' in \cite{\printedmanual}% |
\putwordsection{} ``\printednodename'' \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}% |
| \else |
\else |
| % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the |
% _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the |
| % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand |
% control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand |
| % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of |
% into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of |
| % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the |
% printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the |
| % printing, back off for the \refx-pg. |
% printing, back off for the \refx-pg. |
| {\turnoffactive \refx{#1-snt}{}}% |
{\normalturnoffactive |
| \space [\printednodename],\space |
% Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for |
| |
% @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be. |
| |
\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}% |
| |
\ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi |
| |
}% |
| |
% [mynode], |
| |
[\printednodename],\space |
| |
% page 3 |
| \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}% |
\turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}% |
| \fi |
\fi |
| |
\endlink |
| \endgroup} |
\endgroup} |
| |
|
| % \dosetq is the interface for calls from other macros |
% \dosetq is the interface for calls from other macros |
| |
|
| % Use \turnoffactive so that punctuation chars such as underscore |
% Use \normalturnoffactive so that punctuation chars such as underscore |
| % work in node names. |
% and backslash work in node names. (\turnoffactive doesn't do \.) |
| \def\dosetq #1#2{{\let\folio=0 \turnoffactive \auxhat% |
\def\dosetq#1#2{% |
| \edef\next{\write\auxfile{\internalsetq {#1}{#2}}}% |
{\let\folio=0% |
| \next}} |
\normalturnoffactive |
| |
\edef\next{\write\auxfile{\internalsetq{#1}{#2}}}% |
| |
\iflinks |
| |
\next |
| |
\fi |
| |
}% |
| |
} |
| |
|
| % \internalsetq {foo}{page} expands into |
% \internalsetq {foo}{page} expands into |
| % CHARACTERS 'xrdef {foo}{...expansion of \Ypage...} |
% CHARACTERS 'xrdef {foo}{...expansion of \Ypage...} |
|
Line 4195 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 5339 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| \def\refx#1#2{% |
\def\refx#1#2{% |
| \expandafter\ifx\csname X#1\endcsname\relax |
\expandafter\ifx\csname X#1\endcsname\relax |
| % If not defined, say something at least. |
% If not defined, say something at least. |
| $\langle$un\-de\-fined$\rangle$% |
\angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright |
| \ifhavexrefs |
\iflinks |
| \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `#1'.}% |
\ifhavexrefs |
| \else |
\message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `#1'.}% |
| \ifwarnedxrefs\else |
\else |
| \global\warnedxrefstrue |
\ifwarnedxrefs\else |
| \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}% |
\global\warnedxrefstrue |
| |
\message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}% |
| |
\fi |
| \fi |
\fi |
| \fi |
\fi |
| \else |
\else |
|
Line 4211 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 5357 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| #2% Output the suffix in any case. |
#2% Output the suffix in any case. |
| } |
} |
| |
|
| % Read the last existing aux file, if any. No error if none exists. |
|
| |
|
| % This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file. |
% This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file. |
| \def\xrdef #1#2{ |
% |
| {\catcode`\'=\other\expandafter \gdef \csname X#1\endcsname {#2}}} |
\def\xrdef#1{\begingroup |
| |
% Reenable \ as an escape while reading the second argument. |
| |
\catcode`\\ = 0 |
| |
\afterassignment\endgroup |
| |
\expandafter\gdef\csname X#1\endcsname |
| |
} |
| |
|
| \def\readauxfile{% |
% Read the last existing aux file, if any. No error if none exists. |
| \begingroup |
\def\readauxfile{\begingroup |
| \catcode `\^^@=\other |
\catcode`\^^@=\other |
| \catcode `\&=\other |
\catcode`\^^A=\other |
| \catcode `\=\other |
\catcode`\^^B=\other |
| \catcode `\^^C=\other |
\catcode`\^^C=\other |
| \catcode `\^^D=\other |
\catcode`\^^D=\other |
| \catcode `\^^E=\other |
\catcode`\^^E=\other |
| \catcode `\^^F=\other |
\catcode`\^^F=\other |
| \catcode `\^^G=\other |
\catcode`\^^G=\other |
| \catcode `\^^H=\other |
\catcode`\^^H=\other |
| \catcode `\ =\other |
\catcode`\^^K=\other |
| \catcode `\^^L=\other |
\catcode`\^^L=\other |
| \catcode `\=\other |
\catcode`\^^N=\other |
| \catcode `\=\other |
\catcode`\^^P=\other |
| \catcode `\=\other |
\catcode`\^^Q=\other |
| \catcode `\=\other |
\catcode`\^^R=\other |
| \catcode `\=\other |
\catcode`\^^S=\other |
| \catcode `\=\other |
\catcode`\^^T=\other |
| \catcode `\=\other |
\catcode`\^^U=\other |
| \catcode `\=\other |
\catcode`\^^V=\other |
| \catcode `\=\other |
\catcode`\^^W=\other |
| \catcode `\=\other |
\catcode`\^^X=\other |
| \catcode `\=\other |
\catcode`\^^Z=\other |
| \catcode `\=\other |
\catcode`\^^[=\other |
| \catcode 26=\other |
\catcode`\^^\=\other |
| \catcode `\^^[=\other |
\catcode`\^^]=\other |
| \catcode `\^^\=\other |
\catcode`\^^^=\other |
| \catcode `\^^]=\other |
\catcode`\^^_=\other |
| \catcode `\^^^=\other |
\catcode`\@=\other |
| \catcode `\^^_=\other |
\catcode`\^=\other |
| \catcode `\@=\other |
% It was suggested to define this as 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc. |
| \catcode `\^=\other |
% in xref tags, i.e., node names. But since ^^e4 notation isn't |
| \catcode `\~=\other |
% supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable. Furthermore, |
| \catcode `\[=\other |
% that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^ |
| \catcode `\]=\other |
% character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat |
| \catcode`\"=\other |
% b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first |
| \catcode`\_=\other |
% argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence. It could |
| \catcode`\|=\other |
% all be worked out, but why? Either we support ^^ or we don't. |
| \catcode`\<=\other |
% |
| \catcode`\>=\other |
% The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat: |
| \catcode `\$=\other |
% \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter |
| \catcode `\#=\other |
% and then to call \auxhat in \setq. |
| \catcode `\&=\other |
% |
| % `\+ does not work, so use 43. |
\catcode`\~=\other |
| \catcode 43=\other |
\catcode`\[=\other |
| % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters |
\catcode`\]=\other |
| {% |
\catcode`\"=\other |
| \count 1=128 |
\catcode`\_=\other |
| \def\loop{% |
\catcode`\|=\other |
| \catcode\count 1=\other |
\catcode`\<=\other |
| \advance\count 1 by 1 |
\catcode`\>=\other |
| \ifnum \count 1<256 \loop \fi |
\catcode`\$=\other |
| |
\catcode`\#=\other |
| |
\catcode`\&=\other |
| |
\catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off |
| |
% Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters |
| |
{% |
| |
\count 1=128 |
| |
\def\loop{% |
| |
\catcode\count 1=\other |
| |
\advance\count 1 by 1 |
| |
\ifnum \count 1<256 \loop \fi |
| |
}% |
| }% |
}% |
| }% |
% The aux file uses ' as the escape (for now). |
| % the aux file uses ' as the escape. |
% Turn off \ as an escape so we do not lose on |
| % Turn off \ as an escape so we do not lose on |
% entries which were dumped with control sequences in their names. |
| % entries which were dumped with control sequences in their names. |
% For example, 'xrdef {$\leq $-fun}{page ...} made by @defun ^^ |
| % For example, 'xrdef {$\leq $-fun}{page ...} made by @defun ^^ |
% Reference to such entries still does not work the way one would wish, |
| % Reference to such entries still does not work the way one would wish, |
% but at least they do not bomb out when the aux file is read in. |
| % but at least they do not bomb out when the aux file is read in. |
\catcode`\{=1 |
| \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2 |
\catcode`\}=2 |
| \catcode `\%=\other |
\catcode`\%=\other |
| \catcode `\'=0 |
\catcode`\'=0 |
| \catcode`\^=7 % to make ^^e4 etc usable in xref tags |
\catcode`\\=\other |
| \catcode `\\=\other |
% |
| \openin 1 \jobname.aux |
\openin 1 \jobname.aux |
| \ifeof 1 \else \closein 1 \input \jobname.aux \global\havexrefstrue |
\ifeof 1 \else |
| \global\warnedobstrue |
\closein 1 |
| \fi |
\input \jobname.aux |
| % Open the new aux file. Tex will close it automatically at exit. |
\global\havexrefstrue |
| \openout \auxfile=\jobname.aux |
\global\warnedobstrue |
| |
\fi |
| |
% Open the new aux file. TeX will close it automatically at exit. |
| |
\openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux |
| \endgroup} |
\endgroup} |
| |
|
| |
|
|
Line 4303 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 5466 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| % space to prevent strange expansion errors.) |
% space to prevent strange expansion errors.) |
| \def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 } |
\def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 } |
| |
|
| % @footnotestyle is meaningful for info output only.. |
% @footnotestyle is meaningful for info output only. |
| \let\footnotestyle=\comment |
\let\footnotestyle=\comment |
| |
|
| \let\ptexfootnote=\footnote |
\let\ptexfootnote=\footnote |
|
Line 4329 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 5492 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| % Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the |
% Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the |
| % footnote text as a parameter. Our footnotes don't need to be so general. |
% footnote text as a parameter. Our footnotes don't need to be so general. |
| % |
% |
| \long\gdef\footnotezzz#1{\insert\footins{% |
% Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset and anything else that uses |
| |
% \parseargline fail inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when |
| |
% the footnote is read. --karl, 16nov96. |
| |
% |
| |
\long\gdef\footnotezzz{\insert\footins\bgroup |
| % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the |
% We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the |
| % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment. |
% footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment. |
| % So reset some parameters. |
% So reset some parameters. |
|
Line 4343 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 5510 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| \xspaceskip\z@skip |
\xspaceskip\z@skip |
| \parindent\defaultparindent |
\parindent\defaultparindent |
| % |
% |
| |
\smallfonts \rm |
| |
% |
| % Hang the footnote text off the number. |
% Hang the footnote text off the number. |
| \hang |
\hang |
| \textindent{\thisfootno}% |
\textindent{\thisfootno}% |
|
Line 4351 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 5520 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it |
% expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it |
| % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote. |
% provide a place where TeX can split the footnote. |
| \footstrut |
\footstrut |
| #1\strut}% |
\futurelet\next\fo@t |
| } |
} |
| |
\def\fo@t{\ifcat\bgroup\noexpand\next \let\next\f@@t |
| |
\else\let\next\f@t\fi \next} |
| |
\def\f@@t{\bgroup\aftergroup\@foot\let\next} |
| |
\def\f@t#1{#1\@foot} |
| |
\def\@foot{\strut\par\egroup} |
| |
|
| }%end \catcode `\@=11 |
}%end \catcode `\@=11 |
| |
|
|
Line 4409 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 5583 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| % |
% |
| \def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt} |
\def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt} |
| |
|
| |
% @image. We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this. |
| |
% If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain. |
| |
% |
| |
% Check for and read epsf.tex up front. If we read it only at @image |
| |
% time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get |
| |
% undone and the next image would fail. |
| |
\openin 1 = epsf.tex |
| |
\ifeof 1 \else |
| |
\closein 1 |
| |
% Do not bother showing banner with post-v2.7 epsf.tex (available in |
| |
% doc/epsf.tex until it shows up on ctan). |
| |
\def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }% |
| |
\input epsf.tex |
| |
\fi |
| |
% |
| |
% We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex. |
| |
\newif\ifwarnednoepsf |
| |
\newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to |
| |
work. It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get |
| |
it from ftp://tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.} |
| |
% |
| |
\def\image#1{% |
| |
\ifx\epsfbox\undefined |
| |
\ifwarnednoepsf \else |
| |
\errhelp = \noepsfhelp |
| |
\errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}% |
| |
\global\warnednoepsftrue |
| |
\fi |
| |
\else |
| |
\imagexxx #1,,,\finish |
| |
\fi |
| |
} |
| |
% |
| |
% Arguments to @image: |
| |
% #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension. |
| |
% #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height. |
| |
% #4 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing this stuff. |
| |
\def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{% |
| |
\ifpdf |
| |
\centerline{\dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}}% |
| |
\else |
| |
% \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure. |
| |
\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi |
| |
\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi |
| |
\begingroup |
| |
\catcode`\^^M = 5 % in case we're inside an example |
| |
% If the image is by itself, center it. |
| |
\ifvmode |
| |
\nobreak\bigskip |
| |
% Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert |
| |
% \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space |
| |
% above and below. |
| |
\nobreak\vskip\parskip |
| |
\nobreak |
| |
\centerline{\epsfbox{#1.eps}}% |
| |
\bigbreak |
| |
\else |
| |
% In the middle of a paragraph, no extra space. |
| |
\epsfbox{#1.eps}% |
| |
\fi |
| |
\endgroup |
| |
\fi |
| |
} |
| |
|
| % End of control word definitions. |
|
| |
|
| \message{and turning on texinfo input format.} |
\message{localization,} |
| |
% and i18n. |
| |
|
| \def\openindices{% |
% @documentlanguage is usually given very early, just after |
| \newindex{cp}% |
% @setfilename. If done too late, it may not override everything |
| \newcodeindex{fn}% |
% properly. Single argument is the language abbreviation. |
| \newcodeindex{vr}% |
% It would be nice if we could set up a hyphenation file here. |
| \newcodeindex{tp}% |
% |
| \newcodeindex{ky}% |
\def\documentlanguage{\parsearg\dodocumentlanguage} |
| \newcodeindex{pg}% |
\def\dodocumentlanguage#1{% |
| |
\tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX. |
| |
% Read the file if it exists. |
| |
\openin 1 txi-#1.tex |
| |
\ifeof1 |
| |
\errhelp = \nolanghelp |
| |
\errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}% |
| |
\let\temp = \relax |
| |
\else |
| |
\def\temp{\input txi-#1.tex }% |
| |
\fi |
| |
\temp |
| |
\endgroup |
| } |
} |
| |
\newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or |
| |
is empty. Maybe you need to install it? In the current directory |
| |
should work if nowhere else does.} |
| |
|
| |
|
| % Set some numeric style parameters, for 8.5 x 11 format. |
% @documentencoding should change something in TeX eventually, most |
| |
% likely, but for now just recognize it. |
| |
\let\documentencoding = \comment |
| |
|
| \hsize = 6in |
|
| \hoffset = .25in |
% Page size parameters. |
| |
% |
| \newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt |
\newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt |
| \parindent = \defaultparindent |
|
| \parskip 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt |
|
| \setleading{13.2pt} |
|
| \advance\topskip by 1.2cm |
|
| |
|
| \chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt |
\chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt |
| \secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt |
\secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt |
| \subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt |
\subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt |
| |
|
| % Prevent underfull vbox error messages. |
% Prevent underfull vbox error messages. |
| \vbadness=10000 |
\vbadness = 10000 |
| |
|
| |
% Don't be so finicky about underfull hboxes, either. |
| |
\hbadness = 2000 |
| |
|
| % Following George Bush, just get rid of widows and orphans. |
% Following George Bush, just get rid of widows and orphans. |
| \widowpenalty=10000 |
\widowpenalty=10000 |
|
Line 4447 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 5702 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| % Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're |
% Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're |
| % using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. We want the amount of |
% using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. We want the amount of |
| % stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on |
% stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on |
| % \hsize. This makes it come to about 9pt for the 8.5x11 format. |
% \hsize. We call this whenever the paper size is set. |
| % |
% |
| \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined |
\def\setemergencystretch{% |
| % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway. |
\ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined |
| \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}% |
% Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway. |
| \else |
\def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}% |
| \emergencystretch = \hsize |
\else |
| \divide\emergencystretch by 45 |
\emergencystretch = .15\hsize |
| \fi |
\fi |
| |
|
| % Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.5 format (or else 7x9.25) |
|
| \def\smallbook{ |
|
| \global\chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt |
|
| \global\secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt |
|
| \global\subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt |
|
| % |
|
| \global\lispnarrowing = 0.3in |
|
| \setleading{12pt} |
|
| \advance\topskip by -1cm |
|
| \global\parskip 2pt plus 1pt |
|
| \global\hsize = 5in |
|
| \global\vsize=7.5in |
|
| \global\tolerance=700 |
|
| \global\hfuzz=1pt |
|
| \global\contentsrightmargin=0pt |
|
| \global\deftypemargin=0pt |
|
| \global\defbodyindent=.5cm |
|
| % |
|
| \global\pagewidth=\hsize |
|
| \global\pageheight=\vsize |
|
| % |
|
| \global\let\smalllisp=\smalllispx |
|
| \global\let\smallexample=\smalllispx |
|
| \global\def\Esmallexample{\Esmalllisp} |
|
| } |
} |
| |
|
| |
% Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth; 3) voffset; |
| |
% 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip. Then whoever calls us can |
| |
% set \parskip and call \setleading for \baselineskip. |
| |
% |
| |
\def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6{% |
| |
\voffset = #3\relax |
| |
\topskip = #6\relax |
| |
\splittopskip = \topskip |
| |
% |
| |
\vsize = #1\relax |
| |
\advance\vsize by \topskip |
| |
\outervsize = \vsize |
| |
\advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin |
| |
\pageheight = \vsize |
| |
% |
| |
\hsize = #2\relax |
| |
\outerhsize = \hsize |
| |
\advance\outerhsize by 0.5in |
| |
\pagewidth = \hsize |
| |
% |
| |
\normaloffset = #4\relax |
| |
\bindingoffset = #5\relax |
| |
% |
| |
\parindent = \defaultparindent |
| |
\setemergencystretch |
| |
} |
| |
|
| |
% @letterpaper (the default). |
| |
\def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 |
| |
\parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt |
| |
\setleading{13.2pt}% |
| |
% |
| |
% If page is nothing but text, make it come out even. |
| |
\internalpagesizes{46\baselineskip}{6in}{\voffset}{.25in}{\bindingoffset}{36pt}% |
| |
}} |
| |
|
| |
% Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.5 (or so) format. |
| |
\def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1 |
| |
\parskip = 2pt plus 1pt |
| |
\setleading{12pt}% |
| |
% |
| |
\internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5.in}{\voffset}{.25in}{\bindingoffset}{16pt}% |
| |
% |
| |
\lispnarrowing = 0.3in |
| |
\tolerance = 700 |
| |
\hfuzz = 1pt |
| |
\contentsrightmargin = 0pt |
| |
\deftypemargin = 0pt |
| |
\defbodyindent = .5cm |
| |
% |
| |
\let\smalldisplay = \smalldisplayx |
| |
\let\smallexample = \smalllispx |
| |
\let\smallformat = \smallformatx |
| |
\let\smalllisp = \smalllispx |
| |
}} |
| |
|
| % Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper. |
% Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper. |
| \def\afourpaper{ |
\def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 |
| \global\tolerance=700 |
\setleading{12pt}% |
| \global\hfuzz=1pt |
\parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt |
| \setleading{12pt} |
% |
| \global\parskip 15pt plus 1pt |
\internalpagesizes{53\baselineskip}{160mm}{\voffset}{4mm}{\bindingoffset}{44pt}% |
| |
% |
| \global\vsize= 53\baselineskip |
\tolerance = 700 |
| \advance\vsize by \topskip |
\hfuzz = 1pt |
| %\global\hsize= 5.85in % A4 wide 10pt |
}} |
| \global\hsize= 6.5in |
|
| \global\outerhsize=\hsize |
|
| \global\advance\outerhsize by 0.5in |
|
| \global\outervsize=\vsize |
|
| \global\advance\outervsize by 0.6in |
|
| |
|
| \global\pagewidth=\hsize |
|
| \global\pageheight=\vsize |
|
| } |
|
| |
|
| \bindingoffset=0pt |
|
| \normaloffset=\hoffset |
|
| \pagewidth=\hsize |
|
| \pageheight=\vsize |
|
| |
|
| % Allow control of the text dimensions. Parameters in order: textheight; |
|
| % textwidth; voffset; hoffset; binding offset; topskip. |
|
| % All require a dimension; |
|
| % header is additional; added length extends the bottom of the page. |
|
| |
|
| \def\changepagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6{ |
|
| \global\vsize= #1 |
|
| \global\topskip= #6 |
|
| \advance\vsize by \topskip |
|
| \global\voffset= #3 |
|
| \global\hsize= #2 |
|
| \global\outerhsize=\hsize |
|
| \global\advance\outerhsize by 0.5in |
|
| \global\outervsize=\vsize |
|
| \global\advance\outervsize by 0.6in |
|
| \global\pagewidth=\hsize |
|
| \global\pageheight=\vsize |
|
| \global\normaloffset= #4 |
|
| \global\bindingoffset= #5} |
|
| |
|
| % A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper. Top margin |
% A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper. Top margin |
| % 29mm, hence bottom margin 28mm, nominal side margin 3cm. |
% 29mm, hence bottom margin 28mm, nominal side margin 3cm. |
| \def\afourlatex |
\def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1 |
| {\global\tolerance=700 |
\setleading{13.6pt}% |
| \global\hfuzz=1pt |
% |
| \setleading{12pt} |
\afourpaper |
| \global\parskip 15pt plus 1pt |
\internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}{3.6mm}{3.6mm}{3mm}{7mm}% |
| \advance\baselineskip by 1.6pt |
% |
| \changepagesizes{237mm}{150mm}{3.6mm}{3.6mm}{3mm}{7mm} |
\globaldefs = 0 |
| } |
}} |
| |
|
| % Use @afourwide to print on European A4 paper in wide format. |
% Use @afourwide to print on European A4 paper in wide format. |
| \def\afourwide{\afourpaper |
\def\afourwide{% |
| \changepagesizes{9.5in}{6.5in}{\hoffset}{\normaloffset}{\bindingoffset}{7mm}} |
\afourpaper |
| |
\internalpagesizes{9.5in}{6.5in}{\hoffset}{\normaloffset}{\bindingoffset}{7mm}% |
| |
% |
| |
\globaldefs = 0 |
| |
} |
| |
|
| |
% @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH] |
| |
% Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip, |
| |
% and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow. |
| |
% |
| |
\def\pagesizes{\parsearg\pagesizesxxx} |
| |
\def\pagesizesxxx#1{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish} |
| |
\def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{% |
| |
\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi |
| |
\globaldefs = 1 |
| |
% |
| |
\parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt |
| |
\setleading{13.2pt}% |
| |
% |
| |
\internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}{\voffset}{\normaloffset}{\bindingoffset}{44pt}% |
| |
}} |
| |
|
| |
% Set default to letter. |
| |
% |
| |
\letterpaper |
| |
|
| |
|
| |
\message{and turning on texinfo input format.} |
| |
|
| % Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text. |
% Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text. |
| \catcode`\"=\other |
\catcode`\"=\other |
|
Line 4552 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 5831 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| \catcode`\<=\other |
\catcode`\<=\other |
| \catcode`\>=\other |
\catcode`\>=\other |
| \catcode`\+=\other |
\catcode`\+=\other |
| |
\catcode`\$=\other |
| \def\normaldoublequote{"} |
\def\normaldoublequote{"} |
| \def\normaltilde{~} |
\def\normaltilde{~} |
| \def\normalcaret{^} |
\def\normalcaret{^} |
|
Line 4560 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 5840 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| \def\normalless{<} |
\def\normalless{<} |
| \def\normalgreater{>} |
\def\normalgreater{>} |
| \def\normalplus{+} |
\def\normalplus{+} |
| |
\def\normaldollar{$} |
| |
|
| % This macro is used to make a character print one way in ttfont |
% This macro is used to make a character print one way in ttfont |
| % where it can probably just be output, and another way in other fonts, |
% where it can probably just be output, and another way in other fonts, |
|
Line 4570 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 5851 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| % interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all |
% interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all |
| % typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter. |
% typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter. |
| % |
% |
| \def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\the\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi} |
\def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi} |
| |
|
| |
% Same as above, but check for italic font. Actually this also catches |
| |
% non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from |
| |
% italic fonts. But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway |
| |
% this is not a problem. |
| |
\def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi} |
| |
|
| % Turn off all special characters except @ |
% Turn off all special characters except @ |
| % (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary). |
% (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary). |
|
Line 4578 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 5865 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| % use math or other variants that look better in normal text. |
% use math or other variants that look better in normal text. |
| |
|
| \catcode`\"=\active |
\catcode`\"=\active |
| \def\activedoublequote{{\tt \char '042}} |
\def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}} |
| \let"=\activedoublequote |
\let"=\activedoublequote |
| \catcode`\~=\active |
\catcode`\~=\active |
| \def~{{\tt \char '176}} |
\def~{{\tt\char126}} |
| \chardef\hat=`\^ |
\chardef\hat=`\^ |
| \catcode`\^=\active |
\catcode`\^=\active |
| \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat}} |
|
| \def^{{\tt \hat}} |
\def^{{\tt \hat}} |
| |
|
| \catcode`\_=\active |
\catcode`\_=\active |
|
Line 4593 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 5879 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| \def\_{\leavevmode \kern.06em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}} |
\def\_{\leavevmode \kern.06em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}} |
| |
|
| \catcode`\|=\active |
\catcode`\|=\active |
| \def|{{\tt \char '174}} |
\def|{{\tt\char124}} |
| \chardef \less=`\< |
\chardef \less=`\< |
| \catcode`\<=\active |
\catcode`\<=\active |
| \def<{{\tt \less}} |
\def<{{\tt \less}} |
|
Line 4602 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 5888 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| \def>{{\tt \gtr}} |
\def>{{\tt \gtr}} |
| \catcode`\+=\active |
\catcode`\+=\active |
| \def+{{\tt \char 43}} |
\def+{{\tt \char 43}} |
| |
\catcode`\$=\active |
| |
\def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar} |
| %\catcode 27=\active |
%\catcode 27=\active |
| %\def^^[{$\diamondsuit$} |
%\def^^[{$\diamondsuit$} |
| |
|
|
Line 4632 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 5920 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| % \normalbackslash outputs one backslash in fixed width font. |
% \normalbackslash outputs one backslash in fixed width font. |
| \def\normalbackslash{{\tt\rawbackslashxx}} |
\def\normalbackslash{{\tt\rawbackslashxx}} |
| |
|
| % Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages. |
|
| \escapechar=`\@ |
|
| |
|
| % \catcode 17=0 % Define control-q |
% \catcode 17=0 % Define control-q |
| \catcode`\\=\active |
\catcode`\\=\active |
| |
|
|
Line 4648 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 5933 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| @let|=@normalverticalbar |
@let|=@normalverticalbar |
| @let<=@normalless |
@let<=@normalless |
| @let>=@normalgreater |
@let>=@normalgreater |
| @let+=@normalplus} |
@let+=@normalplus |
| |
@let$=@normaldollar} |
| |
|
| @def@normalturnoffactive{@let"=@normaldoublequote |
@def@normalturnoffactive{@let"=@normaldoublequote |
| @let\=@normalbackslash |
@let\=@normalbackslash |
|
Line 4658 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 5944 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| @let|=@normalverticalbar |
@let|=@normalverticalbar |
| @let<=@normalless |
@let<=@normalless |
| @let>=@normalgreater |
@let>=@normalgreater |
| @let+=@normalplus} |
@let+=@normalplus |
| |
@let$=@normaldollar} |
| |
|
| % Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily. |
% Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily. |
| % This is canceled by @fixbackslash. |
% This is canceled by @fixbackslash. |
|
Line 4677 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
Line 5964 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| % Also back turn on active characters that might appear in the input |
% Also back turn on active characters that might appear in the input |
| % file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format. |
% file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format. |
| % |
% |
| @gdef@fixbackslash{@ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi |
@gdef@fixbackslash{% |
| @catcode`+=@active @catcode`@_=@active} |
@ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi |
| |
@catcode`+=@active |
| |
@catcode`@_=@active |
| |
} |
| |
|
| |
% Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages. |
| |
@escapechar = `@@ |
| |
|
| %% These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special. The @rm below |
% These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special. |
| %% makes sure that the current font starts out as the newly loaded cmr10 |
@catcode`@& = @other |
| @catcode`@$=@other @catcode`@%=@other @catcode`@&=@other @catcode`@#=@other |
@catcode`@# = @other |
| |
@catcode`@% = @other |
| |
|
| |
@c Set initial fonts. |
| @textfonts |
@textfonts |
| @rm |
@rm |
| |
|
| |
|
| @c Local variables: |
@c Local variables: |
| |
@c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp) |
| @c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message" |
@c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message" |
| |
@c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{" |
| |
@c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H" |
| |
@c time-stamp-end: "}" |
| @c End: |
@c End: |
![[BACK]](/cvsweb/icons/back.gif){kind=icon}
Return to texinfo.tex CVS log ![[TXT]](/cvsweb/icons/text.gif){kind=icon}
![[DIR]](/cvsweb/icons/dir.gif){kind=icon}
Up to [gforth] / gforth / doc